T 362

Container Refrigeration
OPERATIONS AND SERVICE

MANUAL
For
PrimeLINE
69NT40-561-200 to 299
69NT40-561-500 to 599
TM
PrimeLINE ONE
69NT40-565-200 to 299
69NT40-565-500 to 599
Container Refrigeration Units
T-362 Rev G
OPERATIONS AND SERVICE
MANUAL
For
PrimeLINE
69NT40-561-200 to 299
69NT40-561-500 to 599
PrimeLINE ONE
69NT40-565-200 to 299
69NT40-565-500 to 599
Container Refrigeration Units
© 2018 Carrier Corporation ● Printed in USA November 2018

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH NUMBER PAGE
SAFETY SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1.1 GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.2 FIRST AID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.4 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.5 SPECIFIC HAZARD STATEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2 REFRIGERANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3 CONFIGURATION IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.4 FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.4.1 Control Box ............................................................. 2–1
2.4.2 Temperature Readout ..................................................... 2–1
2.4.3 Pressure Readout ........................................................ 2–1
2.4.4 Compressor ............................................................. 2–2
2.4.5 Condenser Coil .......................................................... 2–2
2.4.6 Evaporator .............................................................. 2–2
2.4.7 Evaporator Fan Operation .................................................. 2–2
2.4.8 Plate Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.5 OPTION DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.5.1 Battery ................................................................. 2–2
2.5.2 Dehumidification ......................................................... 2–2
2.5.3 USDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.5.4 Interrogator ............................................................. 2–2
2.5.5 Remote Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.5.6 Quest - CCPC ........................................................... 2–2
2.5.7 Communications Interface Module ........................................... 2–2
2.5.8 Autotransformer .......................................................... 2–3
2.5.9 Gutters ................................................................. 2–3
2.5.10 Handles ................................................................ 2–3
2.5.11 Thermometer Port ........................................................ 2–3
2.5.12 Water Cooling ........................................................... 2–3
2.5.13 Back Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.5.14 460 Volt Cable ........................................................... 2–3
2.5.15 230 Volt Cable ........................................................... 2–3
2.5.16 Cable Restraint .......................................................... 2–3
2.5.17 Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up) .............................................. 2–3
2.5.18 Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up) .............................................. 2–3
2.5.19 Labels ................................................................. 2–3
2.5.20 Controller ............................................................... 2–3
2.5.21 Condenser Grille ......................................................... 2–4
2.5.22 Emergency Bypass ....................................................... 2–4
2.5.23 eAutoFresh ............................................................. 2–4
2.5.24 XtendFRESH ............................................................ 2–4
2.5.25 TripWise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
i T-362
2.5.26 FuelWise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.5.27 Quest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.1.3 Evaporator Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.1.4 Compressor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3.1.5 Air-Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.1.6 Water-Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.1.7 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3.1.8 Communications Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.2 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.3 ELECTRICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.4 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.5 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
3.5.1 Standard Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
3.5.2 Economized Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
3.5.3 Electronic Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
MICROPROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1.1 Display Module and Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1.2 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.2 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.2.1 Configuration Software (CnF Variables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.2.2 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.3 MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.3.1 Start Up - Compressor Phase Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.3.2 Start Up - Compressor Bump Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.3.3 Perishable Mode Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.3.4 Perishable Pulldown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.5 Perishable Steady State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.6 Perishable Idle, Air Circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.7 Perishable Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.8 Perishable Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.3.9 Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.3.10 Perishable Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.3.11 Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.3.12 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4.3.13 Perishable Mode - Trim Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.14 Frozen Mode - Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.15 Frozen Steady State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.16 Frozen Idle Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.17 Frozen “Heat” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.18 Frozen Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.19 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.20 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4.3.21 Defrost Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
T-362 ii
4.3.22 Defrost Related Settings .................................................. 4–12
4.3.23 Evaporator Fan Operation ................................................. 4–13
4.3.24 Failure Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.3.25 Generator Protection ..................................................... 4–13
4.3.26 Compressor High Temperature Protection .................................... 4–13
4.3.27 Compressor Low Pressure Protection ........................................ 4–13
4.3.28 Perishable Mode - System Pressure Regulation ................................ 4–13
4.3.29 Condenser Fan Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.4 QUEST - CCPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.5 CONTROLLER ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.6 PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.7 DATACORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.7.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.7.2 DataCORDER Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4.7.3 Sensor Configuration (dCF02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
4.7.4 Logging Interval (dCF03) .................................................. 4–17
4.7.5 Thermistor Format (dCF04) ................................................ 4–18
4.7.6 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) ........................................... 4–20
4.7.7 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 - dCF10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
4.7.8 DataCORDER Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
4.7.9 Pre-Trip Data Recording .................................................. 4–21
4.7.10 DataCORDER Communications ............................................ 4–21
4.7.11 USDA Cold Treatment .................................................... 4–21
4.7.12 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure ........................................... 4–22
4.7.13 DataCORDER Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
4.7.14 DataCORDER Alarms .................................................... 4–24
4.7.15 ISO Trip Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
4.8 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
4.9 CONTROLLER FUNCTION CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–27
4.10 CONTROLLER ALARM INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–37
4.11 CONTROLLER PRE-TRIP TEST CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.1 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2 CONNECT POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2.1 Connecting to 380/460 VAC Power ........................................... 5–1
5.2.2 Connecting to 190/230 VAC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.3 ADJUST FRESH AIR MAKEUP VENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent ............................................... 5–2
5.3.2 Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent ............................................... 5–3
5.3.3 Vent Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.4 EAUTOFRESH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.5 XTENDFRESH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.6 CONNECT WATER-COOLED CONDENSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.6.1 Water-Cooled Condenser with Water Pressure Switch ............................ 5–4
5.6.2 Water-Cooled Condenser with Condenser Fan Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.7 CONNECT REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.8 STARTING AND STOPPING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.8.1 Starting the Unit .......................................................... 5–5
iii T-362
5.8.2 Stopping the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.9 START-UP INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.9.1 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.9.2 Check Controller Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.9.3 Start Temperature Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.9.4 Complete Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.10 PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.11 PROBE DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.12 EMERGENCY BYPASS OPERATION (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.13 TRIPWISE (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
5.13.1 Checking TripWise Status of the Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
5.13.2 Enabling or Disabling TripWise with Function Code 65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
5.13.3 TripWise Status Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
5.14 AUTOMATIC COLD TREATMENT (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.1 UNIT WILL NOT START OR STARTS THEN STOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.2 UNIT OPERATES LONG OR CONTINUOUSLY IN COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.3 UNIT RUNS BUT HAS INSUFFICIENT COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.4 UNIT WILL NOT HEAT OR HAS INSUFFICIENT HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.5 UNIT WILL NOT TERMINATE HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.6 UNIT WILL NOT DEFROST PROPERLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.7 ABNORMAL PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.8 ABNORMAL NOISE OR VIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.9 MICROPROCESSOR MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.10 NO EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW OR RESTRICTED AIR FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.11 EAUTOFRESH NOT OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.12 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.13 AUTOTRANSFORMER MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.14 WATER-COOLED CONDENSER OR WATER PRESSURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.15 COMPRESSOR OPERATING IN REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.16 ABNORMAL TEMPERATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
6.17 ABNORMAL CURRENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.1 SECTION LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2.1 Evacuating the Manifold Gauge Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.3 SERVICE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.3.1 Connecting the Manifold Gauge Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.3.2 Removing the Manifold Gauge Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.4 PUMP DOWN THE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.4.1 Automatic Pump Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.4.2 Manual Pump Down: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.5 REFRIGERANT LEAK CHECKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.6 EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.6.2 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.6.3 Evacuate and Dehydrate - Complete System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.6.4 Evacuate and Dehydrate - Partial System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.7 REFRIGERANT CHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
T-362 iv
7.7.1 Checking the Refrigerant Charge ............................................ 7–6
7.7.2 Adding Refrigerant to System - Full Charge .................................... 7–7
7.7.3 Adding Refrigerant to System - Partial Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.8 CONVERTING TO R-513A REFRIGERANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.9 COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.9.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7.10 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
7.10.1 Checking High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
7.10.2 Replacing High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
7.11 CONDENSER COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
7.11.1 Condenser Coil Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
7.11.2 Condenser Coil Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.11.3 Condenser Coil Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.11.4 Condenser Coil Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.12 CONDENSER FAN AND FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.12.1 Condenser Fan Motor Remove/Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.13 WATER-COOLED CONDENSER CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.13.1 Cleaning Supplies Needed ................................................ 7–14
7.13.2 Cleaning Procedure Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.13.3 Cleaning Procedure Detailed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.14 FILTER DRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.14.1 Checking the Filter Drier: .................................................. 7–16
7.14.2 Replacing the Filter Drier: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.15 EVAPORATOR COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.15.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.16 EVAPORATOR HEATERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.16.1 Megger Testing the Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.17 EVAPORATOR FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.17.1 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.17.2 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly ................................... 7–19
7.17.3 Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.18 EVAPORATOR SECTION CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.18.1 Cleaning Preparation ..................................................... 7–21
7.18.2 Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.19 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (EEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.19.1 Removing an EEV ....................................................... 7–21
7.19.2 Installing an EEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.20 HUMIDITY SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.20.1 Checking the Operation of the Humidity Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.21 ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.21.1 Removing a Solenoid Valve Coil ............................................ 7–24
7.21.2 Removing the Solenoid Valve .............................................. 7–24
7.21.3 Installing the Solenoid Valve ............................................... 7–24
7.21.4 Installing the Solenoid Valve Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.22 ECONOMIZER EXPANSION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.22.1 Removing the Economizer Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.22.2 Installing the Economizer Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.23 TROUBLESHOOTING P6-7 (DUV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
v T-362
7.24 DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE (DUV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
7.24.1 Removing the DUV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
7.24.2 Installing the DUV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
7.25 VALVE OVERRIDE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
7.26 AUTOTRANSFORMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
7.27 CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
7.27.1 Handling Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
7.27.2 Controller Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
7.27.3 Controller Programming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
7.27.4 Loading Operational Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
7.27.5 Loading Configuration Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
7.27.6 Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.27.7 Setting the Container ID: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.27.8 Removing and Installing a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.27.9 Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
7.28 TEMPERATURE SENSOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
7.28.1 Sensor Checkout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
7.28.2 Sensor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–37
7.28.3 Sensor STS and SRS Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
7.28.4 Sensor RRS and RTS Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
7.28.5 Sensor DTS Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
7.28.6 Sensor ETS1 and ETS2 Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
7.28.7 Sensor, CPDS Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
7.29 VENT POSITION SENSOR (VPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
7.30 EAUTOFRESH SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
7.31 XTENDFRESH SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
7.32 MAINTENANCE OF PAINTED SURFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
7.33 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC AND DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1
INDEX .......................................................................... INDEX–1
T-362 vi
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE NUMBER Page
Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section ................................................. 3–1

Figure 3.2 Evaporator Section - PrimeLINE .................................................. 3–2
Figure 3.3 Evaporator Section - PrimeLINE ONE ............................................. 3–3
Figure 3.4 Compressor Section ........................................................... 3–4
Figure 3.5 Air-Cooled Condenser Section ................................................... 3–5
Figure 3.6 Tube In Shell Water-Cooled Condenser ............................................ 3–6
Figure 3.7 Brazed Plate Water-Cooled Condenser ............................................ 3–7
Figure 3.8 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
Figure 3.9 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Standard Operation ................................ 3–13
Figure 3.10 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Economized Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
Figure 3.11 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Water-Cooled Condenser (Tube In Shell) .............. 3–15
Figure 3.12 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Water-Cooled Condenser (Brazed Plate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
Figure 4.1 Temperature Control System .................................................... 4–1
Figure 4.2 Display Module ............................................................... 4–2
Figure 4.3 Keypad ..................................................................... 4–2
Figure 4.4 Control Module ............................................................... 4–3
Figure 4.5 Controller Operation - Perishable Mode ............................................ 4–5
Figure 4.6 Perishable Mode Cooling ....................................................... 4–7
Figure 4.7 Perishable Mode Heating ....................................................... 4–8
Figure 4.8 Controller Operation - Frozen Mode ............................................... 4–9
Figure 4.9 Frozen Mode ................................................................ 4–10
Figure 4.10 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
Figure 4.11 Standard Configuration Download Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19
Figure 4.12 DataCorder Probe Calibration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
Figure 4.13 DataCorder Probe Calibration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
Figure 4.14 DataCorder Systems Tool Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–24
Figure 4.15 Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–36
Figure 5.1 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
Figure 5.2 Upper Fresh Air Make Up Flow Chart .............................................. 5–3
Figure 5.3 Diagram of Emergency Bypass Connections ........................................ 5–9
Figure 5.4 TripWise Status in DataCorder .................................................. 5–11
Figure 5.5 Generating TripWise Summary Report ............................................ 5–11
Figure 5.6 TripWise Summary Report ..................................................... 5–12
Figure 7.1 Manifold Gauge Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
Figure 7.2 Manifold Gauge/Hose Set ....................................................... 7–2
Figure 7.3 Service Valve ................................................................ 7–3
Figure 7.4 Refrigeration System Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
Figure 7.5 Compressor Kit ............................................................... 7–8
Figure 7.6 High Pressure Switch Testing ................................................... 7–10
Figure 7.7 Condenser Fan Position ....................................................... 7–12
Figure 7.8 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning - Forced Circulation .............................. 7–15
Figure 7.9 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning - Gravity Circulation .............................. 7–15
vii T-362
Figure 7.10 Heater Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
Figure 7.11 Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
Figure 7.12 Access Panel Torque Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
Figure 7.13 Electronic Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
Figure 7.14 Coil View of Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
Figure 7.15 Economizer Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
Figure 7.16 Adapter and O-Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
Figure 7.17 View of Digital Unloader Valve (DUV) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
Figure 7.18 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
Figure 7.19 Controller Section of the Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
Figure 7.20 Sensor Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
Figure 7.21 Sensor and Cable Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
Figure 7.22 Supply Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
Figure 7.23 Return Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
Figure 7.24 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
Figure 7.25 Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
Figure 7.26 Communications Interface Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
Figure 8.1 LEGEND - Standard Unit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
Figure 8.2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
Figure 8.3 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
Figure 8.4 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4
Figure 8.5 LEGEND - Unit With Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–5
Figure 8.6 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - Unit With Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6
Figure 8.7 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM, Unit With Autotransformer (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–7
Figure 8.8 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM - Unit With Transformer (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–8
T-362 viii
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE NUMBER Page
Table 3–1 Refrigeration System Data ...................................................... 3–9

Table 3–2 Electrical Data ............................................................... 3–10
Table 3–3 Safety and Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
Table 4–1 Display Module LEDs .......................................................... 4–2
Table 4–2 Keypad Function .............................................................. 4–2
Table 4–3 DataCORDER Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
Table 4–4 DataCORDER Standard Configurations ........................................... 4–20
Table 4–5 Controller Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
Table 4–6 Controller Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–27
Table 4–7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes .................................................. 4–51
Table 4–8 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments ........................................ 4–57
Table 4–9 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Result Records ........................................... 4–58
Table 4–10 DataCORDER Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–59
Table 7–1 Valve Override Control Displays ................................................. 7–28
Table 7–2 Sensor Resistance - AMBS, DTS, ETS, RRS, RTS, SRS, STS ......................... 7–34
Table 7–3 Sensor Resistance - CPDS ..................................................... 7–36
Table 7–4 R-134a Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart .................................... 7–43
Table 7–5 R-513A Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–46
Table 7–6 Recommended Bolt Torque Values (Dry, Non-Lubricated for 18-8 Stainless Steel) . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
ix T-362
SECTION 1
SAFETY SUMMARY
1.1 GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES
Installation and servicing of refrigeration equipment can be hazardous due to system pressures and electrical com-
ponents. Only trained and qualified service personnel should install, repair, or service refrigeration equipment.
When working on refrigeration equipment, observe all potential Danger, Warning and Caution hazards, including
those shown below and on hazard labels attached to the unit.
The following general safety notices supplement specific warnings and cautions appearing elsewhere in this man-
ual. They are recommended precautions that must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance
of the equipment covered herein. The general safety notices are presented in the following three sections labeled:
First Aid, Operating Precautions and Maintenance Precautions. A listing of the specific warnings and cautions
appearing elsewhere in the manual follows the general safety notices.
1.2 FIRST AID

An injury, no matter how slight, should never go unattended. Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately.
1.3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS

Always wear safety glasses.
Keep hands, clothing and tools clear of the evaporator and condenser fans.
Wear appropriate personal protective equipment for the work being undertaken.
No work should be performed on the unit until all circuit breakers and Start-Stop switches are turned off, and power
supply is disconnected.
In case of severe vibration or unusual noise, stop the unit and investigate.
1.4 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and condenser fans. Do not open the condenser fan grille or
evaporator access panels before turning power off, disconnecting and securing the power plug.
Be sure power is turned off before working on motors, controllers, solenoid valves and electrical control switches.
Tag circuit breaker and power supply to prevent accidental energizing of circuit.
Do not bypass any electrical safety devices, e.g. bridging an overload, or using any sort of jumper wires. Problems
with the system should be diagnosed, and any necessary repairs performed by qualified service personnel.
When performing any arc welding on the unit or container, disconnect all wire harness connectors from the mod-
ules in control boxes. Do not remove wire harness from the modules unless you are grounded to the unit frame
with a static safe wrist strap.
In case of electrical fire, open circuit switch and extinguish with CO2 (never use water).
1.5 SPECIFIC HAZARD STATEMENTS

To help identify the label hazards on the unit and explain the level of awareness each one carries, an explanation is
given with the appropriate consequences:
DANGER - means an immediate hazard that WILL result in severe personal injury or death.
WARNING - means to warn against hazards or unsafe conditions that COULD result in severe personal injury or
death.
CAUTION - means to warn against potential hazard or unsafe practice that could result in personal injury, product
or property damage.
The statements listed below are applicable to the refrigeration unit and appear elsewhere in this manual. These
recommended precautions must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance of the equipment
covered herein.
1–1 T-362
! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage. Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak
testing or operating the product. Charge only with refrigerants R-134a or R-513A as specified
for the unit model number: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Standard 700 specification.
! WARNING
Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and condenser fans. The unit may cycle the
fans and compressor unexpectedly as control requirements dictate.
! WARNING
Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) before turning OFF the Start-Stop switch (ST), unit cir-
cuit breaker(s) and external power source.
! WARNING
Make sure the power plugs are clean and dry before connecting to power receptacle.
! WARNING
Make sure that the unit circuit breaker(s) (CB-1 & CB-2) and the Start-Stop switch (ST) are in
the “O” (OFF) position before connecting to any electrical power source.
! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and power plug disconnected before replacing the compressor.
! WARNING
Before disassembly of the compressor, be sure to relieve the internal pressure very carefully
by slightly loosening the couplings to break the seal.
! WARNING
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a pressure regulator.
! WARNING
Do not open the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting power plug.
! WARNING
Oakite No. 32 is an acid. Be sure that the acid is slowly added to the water. DO NOT PUT
WATER INTO THE ACID - this will cause spattering and excessive heat.
! WARNING
Wear rubber gloves and wash the solution from the skin immediately if accidental contact
occurs. Do not allow the solution to splash onto concrete.
T-362 1–2
! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main power supply
before working on moving parts.
! WARNING
Installation requires wiring to the main unit circuit breaker, CB-1. Make sure the power to the
unit is off and power plug disconnected before beginning installation.
! CAUTION
When charging the unit with R-513A refrigerant, charge as a liquid only. R-513A is an azeotrope
blend containing R-1234yf and R-134a. Charging or topping off as a vapor will result in an incor-
rect mixture of blend in the system.
! CAUTION
Charge water-cooled condenser or receiver according to nameplate specifications to ensure
optimal unit performance.
! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from controller modules unless you are grounded to the unit
frame with a static safe wrist strap.
! CAUTION
Unplug all controller module wire harness connectors before performing arc welding on any
part of the container.
! CAUTION
Do not attempt to use an ML2i PC card in an ML3 equipped unit. The PC cards are physically
different and will result in damage to the controller.
! CAUTION
Pre-trip inspection should not be performed with critical temperature cargoes in the container.
! CAUTION
When PRE-TRIP key is pressed, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deactivated.
At the completion of pre-trip activity, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reacti-
vated.
! CAUTION
When condenser water flow is below 11 lpm (3 gpm) or when water-cooled operation is not in
use, the CFS switch MUST be set to position “1” or the unit will not operate properly.
! CAUTION
When a failure occurs during automatic testing, the unit will suspend operation awaiting opera-
tor intervention.
1–3 T-362
! CAUTION
When Pre-Trip test Auto 2 runs to completion without being interrupted, the unit will terminate
pre-trip and display “Auto 2” “end.” The unit will suspend operation until the user depresses
the ENTER key!
! CAUTION
The unit will remain in the full cooling mode as long as the EB switch is in the On position and
the Mode Switch is in the Full Cool position. If the cargo can be damaged by low temperatures,
the operator must monitor container temperature and manually cycle operation as required to
maintain temperature within required limits.
! CAUTION
Allowing the scroll compressor to operate in reverse for more than two minutes will result in
internal compressor damage. Turn the Start-Stop switch OFF immediately.
! CAUTION
To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the manifold gauge set, make sure set is brought to
suction pressure before disconnecting.
! CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suction pressure very quickly. Do not use the compressor
to evacuate the system below 0 psig. Never operate the compressor with the suction or dis-
charge service valves closed (front seated). Internal damage will result from operating the com-
pressor in a deep vacuum.
! CAUTION
Take necessary steps (place plywood over coil or use sling on motor) to prevent motor from
falling into condenser coil.
! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from module unless you are grounded to the unit frame with a
static safe wrist strap.
! CAUTION
Unplug all module connectors before performing arc welding on any part of the container.
! CAUTION
The unit must be OFF whenever a programming card is inserted or removed from the controller
programming port.
! CAUTION
Use care when cutting wire ties to avoid nicking or cutting wires.
! CAUTION
Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice area as this may affect sensor resistance.
T-362 1–4
SECTION 2
INTRODUCTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION
The Carrier Transicold PrimeLINE models 69NT40-561-200 to 299 and 69NT40-561-500 to 599 are units of light-
weight aluminum frame construction, designed to be bolted on to the front of a container and serve as the con-
tainer’s front wall. Forklift pockets are provided for unit installation and removal.
The Carrier Transicold PrimeLINE ONE™ models 69NT40-565-200 to 299 and 69NT40-565-500 to 599 are units
of lightweight aluminum frame construction, designed to be directly installed on-site onto a welded front wall of a
container.
PrimeLINE units are self-contained, all electric units, which include cooling and heating systems to provide precise
temperature control. The units are supplied with a complete charge of refrigerant and compressor lubricating oil,
and are ready for operation upon installation.
The base unit operates on nominal 380/460 volt, 3-phase, 50/60 hertz (Hz) power. An optional autotransformer
may be fitted to allow operation on nominal 190/230, 3-phase, 50/60 Hz power. Control system power is provided
by a transformer which steps the supply power down to 18 and 24 volts, single phase.
The controller is a Carrier Transicold Micro-Link 3 microprocessor. The controller operates automatically to select
cooling, holding or heating as required to maintain the desired set point temperature within very close limits. The
unit may also be equipped with an electronic temperature recorder. The controller has a keypad and display for
viewing or changing operating parameters. The display is also equipped with lights to indicate various modes of
operation.
2.2 REFRIGERANT
PrimeLINE models 69NT40-561-200 to 299 and PrimeLINE ONE™ models 69NT40-565-200 to 299 are units
designed to only be charged with R-134a refrigerant.
PrimeLINE models 69NT40-561-500 to 599 and PrimeLINE ONE™ models 69NT40-565-500 to 599 are R-513A-
ready units. They are supplied with a complete charge of R-134a refrigerant. But, they are capable of being field
converted to R-513A refrigerant at a later date as requested by the unit owner. R-513A is an azeotrope blend con-
taining R-1234yf and R-134a. All information in this manual pertaining to R-513A is only applicable to 561-500 to
599 or 565-500 to 599 model units that have either been converted or are being converted to R-513A.
To convert a R-513A-ready unit to R-513A refrigerant, refer to procedure in Service Section 7.8.
2.3 CONFIGURATION IDENTIFICATION

Unit identification information is provided on a plate located on the back wall of the condenser section. The plate
provides the unit model number, the unit serial number and the unit parts identification number (PID). The model
number identifies the overall unit configuration, while the PID number provides information on specific optional
equipment, factory provisioned to allow for field installation of optional equipment and differences in detailed parts.
2.4 FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS
2.4.1 Control Box

Units are equipped with an aluminum control box, and may be fitted with a lockable door.
2.4.2 Temperature Readout

The unit is fitted with suction and discharge refrigerant temperature sensors. The sensor readings may be viewed
on the controller display.
2.4.3 Pressure Readout

The unit is fitted with evaporator, suction, and discharge pressure transducers. The transducer readings may be
viewed on the controller display.
2–1 T-362
2.4.4 Compressor
The unit is fitted with either an R-134a or an R-513A scroll compressor equipped with suction and discharge ser-
vice connections. To identify an R-513A-ready compressor in the field, a green dot is located on the top of the com-
pressor on the DUV fitting.
2.4.5 Condenser Coil

The unit is fitted with a “C” shape condenser coil.
2.4.6 Evaporator
The evaporator section is equipped with an electronic expansion valve (EEV).
2.4.7 Evaporator Fan Operation

Units are equipped with three-phase evaporator fan motors. Opening of an evaporator fan internal protector will
shut down the unit.
2.4.8 Plate Set

Each unit is equipped with a tethered set of wiring schematics and wiring diagram plates. The plate sets are
ordered using a seven-digit base part number and a two-digit dash number.
2.5 OPTION DESCRIPTIONS

Various options may be factory or field equipped to the base unit. These options are described in the following sub-
paragraphs.
2.5.1 Battery
The refrigeration controller may be fitted with standard replaceable batteries or a rechargeable battery pack.
Rechargeable battery packs may be fitted in the standard location or in a secure location.
2.5.2 Dehumidification
The unit may be fitted with a humidity sensor. This sensor allows setting of a humidity set point in the controller. In
dehumidification mode, the controller will operate to reduce internal container moisture level.
2.5.3 USDA
The unit may be supplied with fittings for additional temperature probes, which allow recording of USDA Cold
Treatment data by the integral DataCORDER function of the Micro-Link refrigeration controller.
2.5.4 Interrogator
Units that use the DataCORDER function are fitted with interrogator receptacles for connection of equipment to
download the recorded data. Two receptacles may be fitted; one is accessible from the front of the container and
the other is mounted inside the container (with the USDA receptacles).
2.5.5 Remote Monitoring

The unit may be fitted with a remote monitoring receptacle. This item allows connection of remote indicators for
COOL, DEFROST and IN RANGE. Unless otherwise indicated, the receptacle is mounted at the control box loca-
tion.
2.5.6 Quest - CCPC

Compressor Cycle Perishable Cooling (CCPC) is a method of temperature control used during steady-state perish-
able cooling that cycles the compressor on and off according to supply / return air temperature conditions.
2.5.7 Communications Interface Module

The unit may be fitted with a communications interface module. The communications interface module is a slave
module which allows communication with a master central monitoring station. The module will respond to commu-
nication and return information over the main power line. Refer to the ship master system technical manual for fur-
ther information.
T-362 2–2
2.5.8 Autotransformer
An autotransformer may be provided to allow operation on 190/230, 3-phase, 50/60 Hz power. The autotrans-
former raises the supply voltage to the nominal 380/460 volt power required by the base unit. The autotransformer
may also be fitted with an individual circuit breaker for the 230 volt power.
If the unit is equipped with an autotransformer and communications module, the autotransformer will be fitted with
a transformer bridge unit (TBU) to assist in communications.
2.5.9 Gutters
Rain gutters may be fitted over the control box and recorder section to divert rain away from the controls.
2.5.10 Handles
The unit may be equipped with handles to facilitate access to stacked containers. These fixed handles are located
on either side of the unit.
2.5.11 Thermometer Port

The unit may be fitted with ports in the front of the frame for insertion of a thermometer to measure supply and/or
return air temperature. If fitted, the port(s) will require a cap and chain.
2.5.12 Water Cooling

The refrigeration system may be provisioned for a water-cooled condenser. The condenser is constructed using
copper nickel tube for sea water applications. Refer to Section 3.1.6 for more information.
2.5.13 Back Panels

Aluminum back panels may have access doors and/or hinge mounting.
2.5.14 460 Volt Cable

Various power cable and plug designs are available for the main 460 volt supply. The plug options tailor the cables
to each customer’s requirements.
2.5.15 230 Volt Cable

Units equipped with an autotransformer require an additional power cable for connection to the 230 volt source. Vari-
ous power cable and plug designs are available. The plug options tailor the cables to each customer’s requirements.
2.5.16 Cable Restraint

Various designs are available for storage of the power cables. These options are variations of the compressor sec-
tion cable guard.
2.5.17 Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up)

The unit may be fitted with an upper fresh air makeup assembly. The fresh air makeup assembly is available with a
vent positioning sensor (VPS) and may also be fitted with screens.
2.5.18 Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up)

The unit may be fitted with a lower fresh air makeup assembly. The fresh air makeup assembly is available with a
vent positioning sensor (VPS) and may also be fitted with screens.
2.5.19 Labels
Safety Instruction and Function Code listing labels differ depending on the options installed. Labels available with
additional languages are listed in the parts list.
2.5.20 Controller
Two replacement controllers are available:
1. Re-manufactured - Controller is equivalent of a new OEM controller, supplied with a 12-month warranty.
2. Repaired - Controller has had previous faults repaired and is upgraded with the latest software.
2–3 T-362
NOTE
Repaired controllers are NOT to be used for warranty repairs; only full OEM Re-manufactured control-
lers are to be used.
Controllers will be factory-equipped with the latest version of operational software, but will NOT be configured for a
specific model number and will need to be configured at the time of installation or sale.
2.5.21 Condenser Grille

Condenser grilles are direct bolted.
2.5.22 Emergency Bypass

The optional Emergency Bypass switch (EB) functions to bypass the controller in the event of controller failure.
2.5.23 eAutoFresh
The optional eAutoFresh™ venting system moderates the atmospheric level inside the container unit in response
to cargo respiration.
Procedures and technical information related to the eAutoFresh™ venting system can be found in the T-342 eAut-
oFresh Manual, located in the Literature section of the Container Refrigeration website. To find the manual from
the Literature section, click on Options > eAutoFresh.
2.5.24 XtendFRESH
XtendFRESH™ is an OEM option that helps slow the ripening process by removing ethylene and simultaneously
controlling CO2 and O2 levels in multiple combinations.
Procedures and technical information related to the XtendFRESH™ controlled atmosphere system can be found in
the T-366 XtendFRESH Manual, located in the Literature section of the Container Refrigeration website. To find
the manual from the Literature section, click on Options > XtendFRESH.
2.5.25 TripWise
TripWise™ is a new premium option available for PrimeLINE units. TripWise is software logic that runs in the back-
ground during every voyage and will let you know whenever a standard pre-trip inspection (PTI) is needed. See
Section 5.13 for more detail.
2.5.26 FuelWise
FuelWise™ is a power-saving option available for PrimeLINE units. FuelWise software works by dynamically
cycling the refrigeration system on and off to save energy while still maintaining temperature within +/- 0.25
degrees Celsius of setpoint on an hourly average.
2.5.27 Quest
Quest (Quality and Energy Efficiency in Storage and Transport) power-saving mode available for PrimeLINE units.
Quest reduces energy requirements by up to 50 percent while reducing emissions related to power consumption.
T-362 2–4
SECTION 3
DESCRIPTION
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3.1.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section

The unit is designed so that the majority of the components are accessible from the front (see Figure 3.1). The unit
model number, serial number and parts identification number can be found on the unit nameplate on the back wall
of the condenser section.
Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section
1 2
3 3
4
7
17
8
16
9
15 14 13 12 11 10
1. Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent Panel. Located 8. Start-Stop Switch (ST)
inside are: Evaporator Fan #2, Defrost Tempera- 9. Compressor
ture Sensor (DTS) 10. Access Panel for Supply Temperature Sensor /
2. Access Panel. Located inside are: Evaporator Fan Supply Recorder Sensor (STS / SRS)
#1, Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV), Heat Termi- 11. Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS)
nation Thermostat (HTT)
12. Economizer Heat Exchanger
3. Fork Lift Pockets
13. Options Label
4. Control Panel
14. Unit Nameplate
5. Unit Display
15. Power Cables and Plug
6. Key Pad
16. Autotransformer location (if equipped)
7. Remote Monitoring Receptacle (if equipped)
17. Condenser Fan
-----
3–1 T-362
3.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent
The function of the upper or lower makeup air vent is to provide ventilation for commodities that require fresh air
circulation. A manually operated venting system is located in the upper left access panel.
3.1.3 Evaporator Section

The evaporator section is shown in Figure 3.2. The evaporator fans circulate air through the container by pulling it into
the top of the unit, directing it through the evaporator coil to be heated or cooled, and discharging it at the bottom.
Most evaporator components are accessible by removing the upper rear panel or by removing the evaporator fan
access panels.
Figure 3.2 Evaporator Section - PrimeLINE
3
2
10
5
11 1
16
4
15
14
13
12
1 9 8 5
1. Evaporator Fan #1 9. Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT)

2. Return Recorder Sensor / Return Temperature 10. Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
Sensor (RRS/RTS) 11. Evaporator Temperature Sensors (ETS1 & ETS2)
3. Humidity Sensor (HS) - PIDs prior to NT2750 12. Interrogator Connector Rear (ICR)
4. Humidity Sensor (HS) - PIDs NT2750 and up 13. USDA Probe Receptacle PR2
5. Evaporator Fan #2 14. USDA Probe Receptacle PR1
6. Evaporator Coil 15. USDA Probe Receptacle PR3
7. Evaporator Coil Heaters 16. Cargo Probe Receptacle PR4
8. Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS)
-----
T-362 3–2
Figure 3.3 Evaporator Section - PrimeLINE ONE
9
2
1
11
12
10
8 7
1. Evaporator Fan #1 7. Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS)

2. Evaporator Fan #2 8. Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT)
3. Return Recorder Sensor / Return Temperature 9. Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
Sensor (RRS / RTS) 10. Evaporator Temperature Sensors (ETS1 & ETS2)
4. Humidity Sensor (HS) 11. Interrogator Connector Rear (ICR)
5. Evaporator Coil 12. USDA Probe Receptacles (PR1, PR2, PR3, PR4)
6. Evaporator Coil Heaters
-----
3–3 T-362
3.1.4 Compressor Section
The compressor section (see Figure 3.4) includes the compressor, digital unloader valve (DUV), high pressure
switch, discharge pressure transducer (DPT), evaporator pressure transducer (EPT) and the suction pressure
transducer (SPT). The supply temperature sensor and supply recorder sensor are located to the left of the com-
pressor.
Figure 3.4 Compressor Section
8
11
10
9
16
12
13
2 3 4
7
14
6
1
15
1. Compressor 9.
Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)
2. Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor 10.
Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
(CPDS) (Location) 11.
Evaporator Pressure Transducer (EPT)
3. Discharge Connection 12.
High Pressure Switch (HPS)
4. Suction Connection (Location) 13.
Discharge Service Valve
5. Compressor Terminal Box 14.
Suction Service Valve
6. Oil Drain (Location) 15.
Supply Temperature Sensor / Supply Recorder
7. Economizer Connection Sensor Assembly (STS / SRS)
8. Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) 16. Warning Label
-----
T-362 3–4
3.1.5 Air-Cooled Condenser Section
The air-cooled condenser section (see Figure 3.5) consists of the condenser fan, condenser coil, receiver, liquid
line service valve, filter drier, fusible plug, economizer, economizer expansion valve, economizer solenoid valve
(ESV), and sight glass/moisture indicator. The condenser fan pulls air from around the coil and discharges it hori-
zontally through the condenser fan grille.
Figure 3.5 Air-Cooled Condenser Section
3 1
6 7 8 9
13
15
14
10 11 12
1. Grille and Venturi Assembly 9. Filter Drier

2. Condenser Fan 10. Economizer
3. Condenser Coil Cover 11. Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
4. Condenser Coil 12. Economizer Expansion Valve
5. Condenser Fan Motor 13. Warning Label (location)
6. Receiver 14. Service Access Valve
7. Sight Glass 15. Liquid Level/Moisture Indicator
8. Fusible Plug
-----
3–5 T-362
3.1.6 Water-Cooled Condenser Section
The unit may contain a water-cooled condenser (wcc) installed as an option. When operating on the water-cooled
condenser, the condenser fan is deactivated by a water pressure switch or condenser fan switch. There are two
types of water-cooled condensers available and both are described below.
a. Tube in Shell Water-Cooled Condenser
The tube in shell water-cooled condenser section (see Figure 3.6) consists of a water-cooled condenser, sight
glass, rupture disc, filter drier, water couplings, water pressure switch, economizer, economizer expansion valve,
economizer solenoid valve (ESV), and moisture/liquid indicator. The water-cooled condenser is in series with the
air-cooled condenser and replaces the standard unit receiver.
Figure 3.6 Tube In Shell Water-Cooled Condenser
2 3 4 5
7
12 11 10 9 8
1. Water-Cooled Condenser 7. Economizer Expansion Valve

2. Rupture Disc 8. Coupling (Water In)
3. Moisture/Liquid Indicator 9. Liquid Line Service Valve/Connection
4. Filter Drier 10. Self Draining Coupling (Water Out)
5. Economizer 11. Water Pressure Switch (WP)
6. Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) 12. Sight Glass
-----
T-362 3–6
b. Brazed Plate Water-Cooled Condenser
The brazed plate water-cooled condenser section (see Figure 3.7) consists of the brazed plate water-cooled con-
denser, water couplings, a water pressure switch and a fusible plug. The receiver is retained in this configuration
and the brazed plate heat exchanger is placed between the air-cooled condenser and the receiver.
Figure 3.7 Brazed Plate Water-Cooled Condenser
3
2
1. Water-Cooled Condenser 3. Self Draining Coupling (Water Out)

2. Coupling (Water In) 4. Water Pressure Switch (WP)
-----
3–7 T-362
3.1.7 Control Box Section
The control box (see Figure 3.8) includes: the manual operation switches, circuit breaker (CB-1), compressor, fan
and heater contactors, control power transformer, fuses, keypad, display module, current sensor module, controller
module and the communications interface module.
Figure 3.8 Control Box Section

2 3 4
5
1
6
12
14
13 11 10 9 8
1. Compressor Contactor - CH 8. Controller Battery Pack (Standard Location)

2. Compressor Phase A Contactor - PA 9. Control Transformer
3. Compressor Phase B Contactor - PB 10. High Speed Evaporator Fan Contactor - EF
4. Heater Contactor - HR 11. Low Speed Evaporator Fan Contactor - ES
5. Controller / DataCORDER Module (Controller) 12. Condenser Fan Contactor - CF
6. Remote Monitoring Receptacle 13. Circuit Breaker - 460V
7. Start-Stop Switch (ST) 14. Current Sensor Module
-----
3.1.8 Communications Interface Module

The unit may be equipped with an optional communications interface module, which is a slave module that allows
communication between the refrigeration unit and a ship system master central monitoring station. The module will
respond to communication and return information over the ship’s main power line. If equipped, this module is
located next to the Controller. Refer to the master system technical manual for further information.
T-362 3–8
3.2 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA
Table 3–1 Refrigeration System Data

a. Compressor/Motor Model Number ZMD26KVE-TFD-272
Assembly Weight (With Oil) 42.9 kg (95 lb)
Approved Oil Uniqema Emkarate RL-32-3MAF
Oil Charge 1774 ml (60 ounces)
b. Electronic Expansion Verify at - 18°C (0°F) 4.4 to 6.7°C (8 to 12°F)
Valve Superheat container box temperature
(Evaporator)
c. Economizer Expansion Verify at - 18°C (0°F) 4.4 to 11.1°C (8 to 20°F)
Valve Superheat container box temperature
d. Heater Termination Opens 54° (+/- 3) C = 130° (+/- 5) F
Thermostat Closes 38° (+/- 4) C = 100° (+/- 7) F
e. High Pressure Switch Cut-Out 25 (+/- 1.0) kg/cm2 = 350 (+/- 10) psig
Cut-In 18 (+/- 0.7) kg/cm2 = 250 (+/- 10) psig
! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
f. Refrigerant R-134a / R-513A Conforming to AHRI standard 700 specifications.
! CAUTION
Charge water-cooled condenser or receiver according to nameplate specifications to ensure
optimal unit performance.
g. Refrigerant Charge PIDs Prior to NT2800:
WCC Tube-In-Shell 4.99 kg (11 lbs)
WCC Brazed Plate 4.85 kg (10.7 lbs)
Receiver 4.54 kg (10 lbs)
PIDs NT2800 and Up:
WCC Brazed Plate 4.58 kg (10.1 lbs)
Receiver 4.26 kg (9.4 lbs)
h. Fusible Plug Melting point 99°C = (210°F)
Torque 6.2 to 6.9 mkg (45 to 50 ft-lbs)
i. Rupture Disc Bursts at 35 +/- 5% kg/cm2 = (500 +/- 5% psig)
Torque 6.2 to 6.9 mkg (45 to 50 ft-lbs)
j. Unit Weight Refer to unit model number plate.
k. Water Pressure Switch Cut-In 0.5 +/- 0.2 kg/cm2 (7 +/- 3 psig)
Cut-Out 1.6 +/- 0.4 kg/cm2 (22 +/- 5 psig)
3–9 T-362
3.3 ELECTRICAL DATA
Table 3–2 Electrical Data
CB-1 (25 amp) Trips at 29 amps
a. Circuit Breaker CB-2 (50 amp) Trips at 62.5 amps
CB-2 (70 amp) Trips at 87.5 amps
b. Compressor Motor Full Load Amps (FLA) 13 amps @ 460 VAC
Nominal Supply 380 VAC / 3 Phase / 50 Hz 460 VAC / 3 Phase / 60 Hz
Full Load Amps .71 amps .72 amps
Horsepower 0.21 hp 0.36 hp
c. Condenser Fan
Rotations Per Minute 1450 rpm 1750 rpm
Motor
Voltage and Frequency 360 - 460 VAC +/- 2.5 Hz 400 - 500 VAC +/- 2.5 Hz
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required.
Rotation Counter-clockwise when viewed from shaft end.
Number of Heaters 6
d. Evaporator Coil Rating 750 watts +5/-10% each @ 230 VAC
Heaters Resistance (cold) 66.8 to 77.2 ohms @ 20°C (68°F)
Type Sheath
380 VAC / 3 Phase / 50 Hz 460 VAC / 3 Phase / 60 Hz
Full Load Amps 1.07 .9
High Speed
Full Load Amps 0.47 0.47
Low Speed
Nominal Horsepower 0.36 0.63
High Speed
e. Evaporator Fan Nominal Horsepower 0.05 0.8
Motor(s) Low Speed
High Speed
Low Speed
Voltage and Frequency 360 - 460 VAC +/- 1.25 Hz 400 - 500 VAC +/- 1.5 Hz
Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required
Rotation CW when viewed from shaft end
Control Circuit 7.5 amps (F3A,F3B)
f. Fuses Controller/DataCORDER 5 amps (F1 & F2)
Emergency Bypass 10 amps (FEB)
Electrical Output 0.5 VDC to 4.5 VDC over 90 degree range
g. Vent Positioning
Supply Voltage 5 VDC +/- 10%
Sensor
Supply Current 5 mA (typical)
Nominal Resistance @ 7.7 ohms +/- 5%
h. Solenoid Valve 77°F (25°C)
Coils (ESV) 24 VDC
Maximum Current Draw 0.7 amps
Nominal Resistance @ 14.8 ohms +/- 5%
i. DUV Coils 12 VDC 77°F (20°C)
Maximum Current Draw 929 mA
T-362 3–10
Table 3–2 Electrical Data (Continued)
Coil Feed to Ground 47 ohms
j. EEV Nominal (Gray Wire)
Resistance
Coil Feed to Coil Feed 95 ohms
Orange wire Power
Red wire Output
Brown wire Ground
Input voltage 5 VDC
Output voltage 0 to 3.3 VDC
k. Humidity Sensor
Output voltage readings verses relative humidity (RH) percentage:
30% 0.99 V
50% 1.65 V
70% 2.31 V
90% 2.97 V
3.4 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES

Unit components are protected from damage by safety and protective devices listed in Table 3–3. These devices
monitor the unit operating conditions and open a set of electrical contacts when an unsafe condition occurs.
Open safety switch contacts on either or both of devices IP-CP or HPS will shut down the compressor.
Open safety switch contacts on device IP-CM will shut down the condenser fan motor.
The entire refrigeration unit will shut down if one of the following safety devices open: (a) circuit breaker(s); (b) fuse
(F3A/F3B, 7.5A); or (c) evaporator fan motor internal protector(s) - (IP).
Table 3–3 Safety and Protective Devices

UNSAFE CONDITION DEVICE DEVICE SETTING
Circuit Breaker (CB-1, 25 amp) - Manual Reset Trips at 29 amps (460 VAC)
Excessive current draw Circuit Breaker (CB-2, 50 amp) - Manual Reset Trips at 62.5 amps (230 VAC)
Circuit Breaker (CB-2, 70 amp) - Manual Reset Trips at 87.5 amps (230 VAC)
Excessive current draw in the Fuse (F3A & F3B) 7.5 amp rating
control circuit
Excessive current draw by the Fuse (F1 & F2) 5 amp rating
controller
Excessive current draw by the Fuse (FEB) 10 amp rating
Emergency Bypass module
Excessive condenser fan motor Internal Protector (IP-CM) - Automatic Reset N/A
winding temperature
Excessive compressor motor Internal Protector (IP-CP) - Automatic Reset N/A
winding temperature
Excessive evaporator fan mo- Internal Protector(s) (IP-EM) - Automatic Reset N/A
tor(s) winding temperature
Fusible Plug - Used on the Receiver 99°C = (210°F)
Abnormal pressures/tempera-
Rupture Disc - Used on the Water-Cooled 35 kg/cm2 = (500 psig)
tures in the high refrigerant side
Condenser
Abnormally high discharge High Pressure Switch (HPS) Opens at 25 kg/cm2
pressure (350 psig)
3–11 T-362
3.5 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT
3.5.1 Standard Operation

Starting at the compressor, (see Figure 3.9) the suction gas is compressed to a higher pressure and temperature.
The refrigerant gas flows through the discharge line and continues into the air-cooled condenser. When operating
with the air-cooled condenser active, air flowing across the coil fins and tubes cools the gas to saturation tempera-
ture. By removing latent heat, the gas condenses to a high pressure/high temperature liquid and flows to the
receiver, which stores the additional charge necessary for low temperature operation.
When operating with the water-cooled condenser active (see Figure 3.11, Figure 3.12), the refrigerant gas passes
through the air-cooled condenser and enters the water-cooled condenser shell. The water flowing inside the tubing
cools the gas to saturation temperature in the same manner as the air passing over the air-cooled condenser. The
refrigerant condenses on the outside of the tubes and exits as a high temperature liquid. The water-cooled con-
denser also acts as a receiver, storing refrigerant for low temperature operation.
The liquid refrigerant continues through the liquid line, the filter drier (which keeps refrigerant clean and dry) and
the economizer (not active during standard operation) to the electronic expansion valve (EEV).
As the liquid refrigerant passes through the variable orifice of the EEV, the pressure drops to suction pressure. In
this process some of the liquid vaporizes to a gas (flash gas), removing heat from the remaining liquid. The liquid
exits as a low pressure, low temperature, saturated mix. Heat is then absorbed from the return air by the balance of
the liquid, causing it to vaporize in the evaporator coil. The vapor then flows through the suction tube back to the
compressor.
On systems fitted with a water pressure switch, the condenser fan will be off when there is sufficient pressure to
open the switch. If water pressure drops below the switch cut out setting, the condenser fan will automatically start.
During the standard mode of operation, the normally closed digital unloader valve (DUV) controls the system refrig-
erant flow and capacity by loading and unloading the compressor in frequent discrete time intervals. If the system
capacity has been decreased to the lowest allowable capacity with the DUV, the unit will enter a trim heat mode of
operation, during which the controller will pulse the evaporator heaters in sequence with the compressor digital sig-
nal in order to absorb the excess capacity.
3.5.2 Economized Operation

In the economized mode, (see Figure 3.10) the frozen and pull down capacity of the unit is increased by sub-cool-
ing the liquid refrigerant entering the electronic expansion valve. Overall efficiency is increased because the gas
leaving the economizer enters the compressor at a higher pressure, therefore requiring less energy to compress it
to the required condensing conditions.
Liquid refrigerant for use in the economizer circuit is taken from the main liquid line as it leaves the filter drier. The
flow is activated when the controller energizes the economizer solenoid valve (ESV).
The liquid refrigerant flows through the ESV to the expansion valve internal passages, absorbing heat from the liq-
uid refrigerant flowing to the electronic expansion valve. The resultant “medium” temperature/pressure gas enters
the compressor at the economizer port fitting.
When the control air temperature falls to 2.0°C (3.6°F) above setpoint, the DUV unloads the compressor’s scroll
and begins to reduce the capacity of the unit. Percentage of the unit capacity is accessed through code select 01
(Cd01). For example, if Cd01 displays 70, it indicates that the compressor is operating unloaded with the DUV
engaged 30% of the time.
3.5.3 Electronic Expansion Valve

The microprocessor controls the superheat leaving the evaporator via the electronic expansion valve (EEV), based
on inputs from the evaporator pressure transducer (EPT). The microprocessor transmits electronic pulses to the
EEV stepper motor, which opens or closes the valve orifice to maintain the superheat setpoint.
T-362 3–12
Figure 3.9 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Standard Operation
18
19
16
17
3
7 10
6 20
4
8 9
13
21
11 1
22
15
12
14 23
1. Compressor 13. Economizer TXV Sensing Bulb

2. Discharge Service Valve 14. Economizer
3. Discharge Pressure Transducer 15. Economizer Connection
4. Condenser 16. Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
5. Fusible Plug 17. Evaporator
6. Receiver 18. Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1)
7. Sight Glass 19. Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS2)
8. Liquid Level / Moisture Indicator 20. Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)
9. Liquid Line Service Valve 21. Evaporator Pressure Transducer
10. Filter Drier 22. Suction Pressure Transducer
11. Economizer Solenoid Valve 23. Suction Service Valve
12. Economizer TXV
-----
3–13 T-362
Figure 3.10 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Economized Operation
18
19
16
17
3
7 10
20
4 6
8 9
13
21
11
22
1
15
12
14 23
1. Compressor 13. Economizer TXV Sensing Bulb

2. Discharge Service Valve 14. Economizer
3. Discharge Pressure Transducer 15. Economizer Connection
4. Condenser 16. Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
5. Fusible Plug 17. Evaporator
6. Receiver 18. Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1)
7. Sight Glass 19. Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS2)
8. Liquid Level / Moisture Indicator 20. Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)
9. Liquid Line Service Valve 21. Evaporator Pressure Transducer
10. Filter Drier 22. Suction Pressure Transducer
11. Economizer Solenoid Valve 23. Suction Service Valve
12. Economizer TXV
-----
T-362 3–14
Figure 3.11 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Water-Cooled Condenser (Tube In Shell)
21
22
20 19
3
4 23
5
16
11 24
14
13
1
25
6 12 18
9
15
7 26
17
8
10
1. Compressor 14. Economizer Solenoid Valve

2. Discharge Service Valve 15. Economizer Thermal Expansion Valve
3. Discharge Pressure Transducer 16. Economizer TXV Sensing Bulb
4. Condenser 17. Economizer
5. Rupture Disk 18. Economizer Connection
6. Water-Cooled Condenser 19. Electronic Expansion Valve
7. Sight Glass 20. Evaporator
8. Coupling (Water In) 21. Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1)
9. Water Pressure Switch 22. Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS2)
10. Coupling (Water Out) 23. Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)
11. Moisture Indicator 24. Evaporator Pressure Transducer
12. Liquid Line Service Valve 25. Suction Pressure Transducer
13. Filter Drier 26. Suction Service Valve
-----
3–15 T-362
Figure 3.12 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic - Water-Cooled Condenser (Brazed Plate)
22
23
21 20
3
11 14
24
4
10
2
12 13
17
25
1
15
5
26
7
19
16 18 27
8
6
1. Compressor 15. Economizer Solenoid Valve

2. Discharge Service Valve 16. Economizer Thermal Expansion Valve
3. Discharge Pressure Transducer 17. Economizer TXV Sensing Bulb
4. Condenser 18. Economizer
5. Water-Cooled Condenser 19. Economizer Connection
6. Coupling (Water In) 20. Electronic Expansion Valve
7. Water Pressure Switch 21. Evaporator
8. Coupling (Water Out) 22. Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1)
9. Fusible Plug 23. Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS2)
10. Receiver 24. Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)
11. Sight Glass 25. Evaporator Pressure Transducer
12. Sight Glass / Moisture Indicator 26. Suction Pressure Transducer
13. Liquid Line Service Valve 27. Suction Service Valve
14. Filter Drier
-----
SECTION 4
MICROPROCESSOR
4.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEM
The temperature control Micro-Link 3 microprocessor system (see Figure 4.1) consists of a keypad, display mod-
ule, control module (controller) and interconnecting wiring. The controller houses the temperature control software
and the DataCORDER software. The temperature control software functions to operate the unit components as
required to provide the desired cargo temperature and humidity. The DataCORDER software functions to record
unit operating parameters and cargo temperature parameters for future retrieval. Coverage of the temperature con-
trol software begins with Section 4.2. Coverage of the DataCORDER software is provided in Section 4.7.
Figure 4.1 Temperature Control System
4.1.1 Display Module and Keypad

The display module and keypad are mounted on the control box door and serve to provide user access and read-
outs for both of the controller functions, temperature control and DataCORDER. The functions are accessed by
keypad selections and viewed on the display module.
The display module (see Figure 4.2) consists of two 5-digit displays and seven indicator lights. Descriptions of the
indicator lights are provided in Table 4–1. The keypad (see Figure 4.3) consists of eleven push button switches
that act as the user’s interface with the controller. Descriptions of the switch functions are provided in Table 4–2.
4–1 T-362
Figure 4.2 Display Module Figure 4.3 Keypad
CODE PRE
SELECT TRIP
MANUAL
ALARM
DEFROST/
LIST
INTERVAL
ENTER
RETURN C
SUPPLY F
BATTERY ALT
POWER MODE
Table 4–1 Display Module LEDs Table 4–2 Keypad Function

LIGHT FUNCTION KEY FUNCTION
COOL Energized when the refrigerant compres- CODE SELECT Access function codes.
(White / Blue) sor is energized.
PRE-TRIP Display Pre-Trip selection menu. Discon-
HEAT Energized to indicate heater operation in tinue pre-trip in progress.
(Orange) heat mode, defrost mode, or dehumidifica-
ALARM LIST Display alarm list and clear alarm queue.
tion.
MANUAL Display selected defrost mode. Press and
DEFROST Energized when the unit is in defrost
DEFROST / hold this key for five seconds to initiate de-
(Orange) mode.
INTERVAL frost using same logic as if the optional
IN RANGE Energized when the controlled tempera- manual defrost switch was toggled on.
(Green) ture probe is within specified tolerance of
ENTER Confirm a selection or save a selection to
setpoint. The controlling probe in perish-
the controller.
able range is the SUPPLY air probe and in
frozen range is the RETURN air probe. Arrow Up Change or scroll a selection up. Pre-trip
advance or test interrupt.
SUPPLY Energized when the supply air probe is
(Yellow) used for control. When this LED is illumi- Arrow Down Change or scroll selection down. Pre-trip
nated, the temperature displayed in the repeat backward.
AIR TEMPERATURE display is the read-
ing at the supply air probe. This LED will RETURN / Display non-controlling probe tempera-
flash if dehumidification or humidification SUPPLY ture (momentary display).
is enabled. °C / °F Display alternate english / metric scale
RETURN Energized when the return air probe is (momentary display). When set to F,
(Yellow) used for control. When this LED is illumi- pressure is displayed in psig and vacuum
nated, the temperature displayed in the in “/hg.” “P” appears after the value to in-
AIR TEMPERATURE display is the read- dicate psig and “i” appears for inches of
ing at the return air probe. mercury. When set to C, pressure read-
ings are in bars. “b” appears after the val-
ALARM Energized when an active or inactive shut- ue to indicate bars.
(Red) down alarm is in the alarm queue.
BATTERY Initiate battery backup mode to allow set-
POWER point & function code selection if AC
power is not connected.
ALT MODE Switch the functions from temperature
software to DataCORDER software. The
remaining keys function the same as de-
scribed above except the readings or
changes are made to the DataCORDER
programming.
T-362 4–2
4.1.2 Controller
! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from controller modules unless you are grounded to the unit
frame with a static safe wrist strap.
! CAUTION
Unplug all controller module wire harness connectors before performing arc welding on any
part of the container.
! CAUTION
Do not attempt to use an ML2i PC card in an ML3 equipped unit. The PC cards are physically
different and will result in damage to the controller.
NOTE
Do not attempt to service the controller modules. Breaking the seal will void the warranty.
The control module (see Figure 4.4) is fitted with test points, harness connectors and a software card program-
ming port.
Figure 4.4 Control Module
1 2 3 4 5 3 6 7 3 8 3
EN12830
(7.5A)
(7.5A)
KB
CONTROLLER With
OC1
(5A)
(5A)
F3A
F3B
KA
MC
MA
MB
CARRIER
KH
TP
F2
F1
Micro-Link3 S/N: 0491162 REV 5147 YYWW: 1035 12-00579-00

DataCORDER T B C1 KE KD KC 59980
1. Mounting Screw 5. Fuses

2. Micro-Link 3 Controller/DataCORDER Module 6. Control Circuit Power Connection
3. Connectors 7. Software Programming Port
4. Test Points 8. Battery Pack (Standard Location)
-----
4.2 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

The controller software is a custom designed program that is subdivided into configuration software and opera-
tional software. The controller software performs the following functions:
• Control supply or return air temperature to required limits, provide modulated refrigeration operation, econo-
mized operation, unloaded operation, electric heat control, and defrost. Defrost is performed to clear buildup
of frost and ice to ensure proper air flow across the evaporator coil.
• Provide default independent readouts of setpoint and supply or return air temperatures.
• Provide ability to read and (if applicable) modify the configuration software variables, operating software
function codes and alarm code indications.
• Provide a pre-trip step-by-step checkout of refrigeration unit performance including: proper component oper-
ation, electronic and refrigeration control operation, heater operation, probe calibration, pressure limiting and
current limiting settings.
• Provide battery-powered ability to access or change selected codes and setpoint without AC power con-
nected.
• Provide the ability to reprogram the software through the use of a memory card.
4–3 T-362
4.2.1 Configuration Software (CnF Variables)
Configuration software is a variable listing of the components available for use by the operational software. This
software is factory installed in accordance with the equipment fitted and options listed on the original purchase
order. Changes to the configuration software are required only when a new controller has been installed or a phys-
ical change has been made to the unit such as the addition or removal of an option. A configuration variable list is
provided in Table 4–5. Change to the factory-installed configuration software is achieved via a configuration card or
by communications.
4.2.2 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes)

The operational software is the actual operation programming of the controller which activates or deactivates com-
ponents in accordance with current unit operating conditions and selected modes of operation.
The programming is divided into function codes. Some of the codes are read only, while the remaining codes may
be user configured. The value of the user configurable codes can be assigned in accordance with user desired
mode of operation. A list of the function codes is provided in Table 4–6.
To access the function codes:
1. Press the CODE SELECT key on the keypad.
2. Press an Arrow key until the left window displays the desired function code.
3. The right window will display the selected function code value for five seconds before returning to normal
display mode.
4. If additional time is required, pressing the ENTER key will extend the display time to 30 seconds.
4.3 MODES OF OPERATION

General operation sequences for cooling, heating and defrost are provided in the following sub-paragraphs. Sche-
matic representation of controller operation is provided in Figure 4.6, Figure 4.7 & Figure 4.8.
Operational software responds to various inputs. These inputs come from the temperature sensors and pressure
transducers, the temperature setpoint, the settings of the configuration variables and the function code assignments.
The action taken by the operational software changes as the input values change. Overall interaction of the inputs is
described as a “mode” of operation. The modes of operation include perishable (chill) mode and frozen mode. Descrip-
tions of the controller interaction and modes of operation are provided in the following sub paragraphs.
4.3.1 Start Up - Compressor Phase Sequence

At start up, the controller logic checks for proper phase sequencing and compressor rotation. If incorrect sequenc-
ing is causing the compressor and three-phase evaporator fan motors to rotate in the wrong direction, the controller
will energize or de-energize relay TCP as required. Relay TCP will switch its contacts, energizing or de-energizing
relays PA and PB. Relay PA is wired to energize the circuits on L1, L2 and L3. Relay PB is wired to energize the cir-
cuits on L3, L2, and L1, thus providing reverse rotation.
4.3.2 Start Up - Compressor Bump Start

At start up, the controller logic will initiate a compressor bump start procedure to clear liquid refrigerant from the
compressor. If suction and discharge pressures have equalized, the compressor will perform three compressor
bump starts. A compressor bump start may also occur after a defrost cycle has been completed.
During bump start, the EEV will close. Relays TS, TQ, TN, TE, and TV will be de-energized (opened). The result of
this action will close the ESV and shut all fans off. The compressor will start for 1 second, then pause for five sec-
onds. This sequence will be repeated two more times. After the final bump start, the unit will pre-position the EEV
to the correct starting position, pause and then start up.
4.3.3 Perishable Mode Temperature Control

In Perishable mode, the controller maintains the supply air temperature at setpoint, the SUPPLY indicator light is
illuminated and the default reading on the display window is the supply temperature sensor reading.
When the supply air temperature enters the in-range temperature tolerance (Cd30), the green IN-RANGE light will
energize.
When CnF26 (Heat Lockout Temperature) is set to -10°C, Perishable mode is active with setpoints above -10°C
(+14°F). When CnF26 is set to -5°C, Perishable mode is active with setpoints above -5°C (+23°F).
T-362 4–4
4.3.4 Perishable Pulldown
When the system is in Perishable Pulldown mode, the highest priority is given to bringing the container down to
setpoint. When cooling from a temperature that is more than 2.5°C (4.5°F) above setpoint, the system will be in
Perishable Pulldown mode in economized operation. However, pressure and current limit functions may restrict the
valve if either exceeds the preset value.
4.3.5 Perishable Steady State

In Perishable Steady State mode, the control temperature is maintained near a setpoint that is above the heat lock-
out temperature. Once setpoint is reached, the unit will transition to Perishable Steady State mode. This results in
unloaded operation by cycling the DUV to limit capacity and maintain steady temperature control.
The unit is capable of maintaining supply air temperature to within +/- 0.2°C (+/- 0.36°F) of setpoint. Supply air tem-
perature is controlled by positioning of the electronic expansion valve (EEV), cycling of the digital unloader valve
(DUV), cycling of the compressor, and cycling of the heaters.
4.3.6 Perishable Idle, Air Circulation

When it is unnecessary to run the compressor to maintain control temperature, the system enters Perishable Idle
mode. If the controller has determined that cooling is not required or the controller logic determines suction pres-
sure is at the low pressure limit, the unit will transition to Perishable Idle mode. During Perishable Idle mode, the
compressor is turned off, but the evaporator fans continue to run to circulate air throughout the container. If tem-
perature rises +0.2°C (0.4°F) above setpoint, the unit will transition back to Perishable Steady State mode.
4.3.7 Perishable Heating

When it is necessary to raise the control temperature, the system will enter Perishable Heating mode. If the tem-
perature drops to 0.5°C (0.9°F) below setpoint, the unit will transition to Perishable Heating mode, and the heaters
will be energized. The unit will transition back to Perishable Idle mode when the temperature rises to 0.2°C (0.4°F)
below the setpoint, and the heaters will de-energize.
Figure 4.5 Controller Operation - Perishable Mode
Perishable Mode Pull Down

(Only Applicable to Perishable Mode)
Controller Set Point ABOVE -10qC (+14qF), Controller Set Point ABOVE -10qC (+14qF),
or -5qC (+23qF) optionally or -5qC (+23qF) optionally

+2.5qC
(+4.5qF)
Cooling, Cooling,
Unloaded Enconomized
Set +0.20qC
Point Set
Cooling, Point
Air Circulation -0.25qC Unloaded
-0.20qC -0.20qC
-0.50qC AirCirculation
Air Circulation
-0.50qC
Heating
Heating
Falling Rising
Temperature Temperature
4–5 T-362
4.3.8 Perishable Dehumidification
Dehumidification is provided to reduce the humidity levels inside the container. The dehumidification setpoint range
is from 50% to 95%. Dehumidification is activated when a humidity value is set at Cd33. The yellow SUPPLY LED
will flash ON and OFF every second to indicate that Dehumidification is active. Once Dehumidification is active and
the following conditions are satisfied, the controller will activate the heat relay to begin Dehumidification.
1. The humidity sensor reading is above the humidity setpoint (Cd33).
2. The unit is in Perishable Steady State and supply air temperature is less than 0.25°C (0.45°F) above setpoint.
3. The heater debounce timer (three minutes) has timed out.
4. Heater Termination Thermostat (HTT) is closed.
If the above conditions are true for at least one hour, the evaporator fans will switch from high speed to low speed.
Evaporator fan speed will then switch every hour, as long as the four conditions are met (see Bulb mode, Section
4.3.9 for different evaporator fan speed options).
If any condition except item (1) becomes false OR if the relative humidity sensed is 2% below the dehumidification
setpoint, the high speed evaporator fans will be energized.
During dehumidification, power is applied to the defrost heaters. This added heat load causes the controller to open
the EEV to match the increased heat load while still holding the supply air temperature very close to the setpoint.
Opening the EEV reduces the temperature of the evaporator coil surface, which increases the rate at which water
is condensed and removes water from the passing air. Removing water from the air reduces the relative humidity.
When the relative humidity sensed is 2% below setpoint, the controller de-energizes the heat relay. The controller
will continue to cycle heating to maintain relative humidity below the selected setpoint. If dehumidification is termi-
nated by a condition other than the humidity sensor, e.g., an out-of-range or compressor shutdown condition, the
heat relay is de-energized immediately.
Two timers are activated during dehumidification to prevent rapid cycling and consequent contactor wear:
1. Heater debounce timer (three minutes) - The heater debounce timer is started whenever the heater contac-
tor status is changed. The heat contactor remains energized (or de-energized) for at least three minutes
even if the setpoint criteria are satisfied.
2. Out-of-range timer (five minutes) - The out-of-range timer is started to maintain heater operation during a
temporary out-of-range condition. If supply air temperature remains outside of the user selected in-range
setting for more than five minutes, the heaters will be de-energized to allow the system to recover. The out-
of-range timer starts as soon as temperature exceeds in-range tolerance value set by Cd30.
4.3.9 Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode

Bulb mode is an extension of dehumidification which allows changes to the evaporator fan speed and/or defrost
termination setpoints.
Bulb mode is active when Cd35 is set to “Bulb.” Once Bulb mode is activated, the user may then change dehumid-
ification evaporator fan operation from the default (speed alternates from low to high each hour) to constant low or
constant high speed. This is done by toggling Cd36 from its default of “alt” to “Lo” or “Hi” as desired. If low speed
evaporator fan operation is selected, this gives the user the additional capability of selecting dehumidification set-
points from 50 to 95%.
In addition, if Bulb mode is active, Cd37 may be set to override the previous defrost termination thermostat (DTT)
settings. The temperature at which the DTT will be considered “open” may be changed [in 0.1°C (0.2°F) incre-
ments] to any value between 25.6°C (78°F) and 4°C (39.2°F). The temperature at which the DTT is considered
closed for interval timer start or demand defrost is 10°C (50°F) for “open” values from 25.6°C (78°F) down to a
10°C (50°F) setting. For “open” values lower than 10°C, the “closed” values will decrease to the same value as the
“open” setting. Bulb mode is terminated when:
1. Bulb mode code Cd35 is set to “Nor.”
2. Dehumidification code Cd33 is set to “Off.”
3. The user changes the setpoint to one that is in the frozen range.
When Bulb mode is disabled by any of the above conditions, evaporator fan operation for dehumidification reverts
to “alt” and the DTS termination setting resets to the value determined by CnF41.
T-362 4–6
4.3.10 Perishable Economy
Economy Fan mode is an extension of the Perishable mode, and is provided for power saving purposes. Economy
Fan mode is activated when Cd34 (also used for Frozen Economy mode) is set to “ON.” Economy Fan mode is
used in the transportation of temperature-tolerant cargo or non-respiration items which do not require high airflow
for removing respiration heat.
There is no active display that indicates that Economy Fan mode has been initiated. To check for Economy Fan
mode, perform a manual display of Cd34.
In order to initiate Economy Fan mode, a perishable setpoint must be selected prior to activation. When Economy
Fan mode is active, the evaporator fans will be controlled as follows:
a. At the start of each cooling or heating cycle, the evaporator fans will run in high speed for three minutes.
b. They will then be switched to low speed any time the supply air temperature is within +/- 0.2°C (0.36°F) of
the setpoint and the return air temperature is less than or equal to the supply air temperature + 3°C (5.4°F).
c. The fans will continue to run in low speed for one hour.
d. At the end of the hour, the evaporator fans will switch back to high speed and the cycle will be repeated. If
Bulb mode is active, Economy Fan mode will be overridden.
4.3.11 Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation
NOTE
In Standard Perishable mode, the evaporator motors run in high speed. In Economy Fan mode, the
fan speed is varied.
a. When supply air temperature is above setpoint and decreasing, the unit will cool with the condenser fan
motor (CF), compressor motor (CH), and evaporator fan motors (EF) energized, and the white COOL light
illuminated. (See Figure 4.6). Also, if current or pressure limiting is not active, the controller will close con-
tacts TS to open the economizer solenoid valve (ESV) and place the unit in economized operation.
Figure 4.6 Perishable Mode Cooling
ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
ST
F 24 VOLT POWER
HPS TC CH
IP-CM TN CF
TV EF ES
IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF
HTT TH HR
TS ESV
b. When supply air temperature decreases to a predetermined tolerance above setpoint (Cd30), the green IN
RANGE light is illuminated.
c. As air temperature continues to fall, unloaded cooling starts (DUV pulses opens) as the supply air tempera-
ture approaches setpoint. (See Figure 4.5).
4–7 T-362
d. When unloaded cooling starts, EEV control will transition from a full cool superheat setpoint to a lower mod-
ulated cool superheat setpoint. Once unloading starts, the EEV controls evaporator superheat based on the
system duty cycle where instantaneous superheat will vary.
e. When the supply air temperature has fallen to within 1.9°C (3.4°F) of setpoint temperature and the average
capacity of the system has fallen below 70%, the unit will open contacts TS to close the ESV and take the
unit out of economized operation.
f. The controller continuously monitors supply air temperature. Once the supply air temperature falls below
setpoint, the controller periodically records supply air temperature, setpoint and time. A calculation is then
performed to determine temperature drift from setpoint over time. If the calculation determines that cooling
is no longer required, contacts TC and TN are opened to de-energize the compressor motor and the con-
denser fan motor. In addition the controller will close the EEV.
g. The evaporator fan motors continue to run to circulate air throughout the container. The green IN RANGE
light remains illuminated as long as the supply air temperature is within tolerance of the setpoint.
h. If the supply air temperature increases to 1.0°C (1.8°F) above setpoint and three minutes have elapsed,
contacts TC and TN close to restart the compressor and condenser fan motors in standard mode (non-
economized) operation. The white COOL light is also illuminated.
i. If the average system capacity has risen to 100% during unloaded cooling and three minutes off time has
elapsed, relay TS will energize to open the ESV, placing the unit in economized mode.
j. If the supply air increases more than 2.5°C (4.5°F) above setpoint temperature, the microprocessor will transi-
tion the evaporator superheat control from modulation back to full cool control.
4.3.12 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation

a. If the supply air temperature decreases 0.5°C (0.9°F) below setpoint, the system enters the heating mode
(see Figure 4.5). The controller closes contacts TH (see Figure 4.7) to allow power flow through the heat
termination thermostat (HTT) to energize the heaters (HR). The orange HEAT light is also illuminated. The
evaporator fans continue to run to circulate air throughout the container.
b. When the supply air temperature rises to 0.2°C (0.4°F) below setpoint, contact TH opens to de-energize the
heaters. The orange HEAT light is also de-energized. The evaporator fans continue to run to circulate air
throughout the container.
c. The safety heater termination thermostat (HTT) is attached to an evaporator coil circuit and will open the
heating circuit if overheating occurs.
Figure 4.7 Perishable Mode Heating
ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
ST
F 24 VOLT POWER
HPS TC CH
IP-CM TN CF
TV EF ES
IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF
HTT TH HR
TS ESV
NOTE
The EEV and DUV are independently operated by the microprocessor. For full diagrams and legend,
see Section 8.
T-362 4–8
4.3.13 Perishable Mode - Trim Heat
If the system capacity has been decreased to the lowest allowable capacity and conditions exist that warrant max-
imum temperature stability the controller will pulse the HR relay to energize the evaporator heaters in sequence
with the compressor digital signal.
4.3.14 Frozen Mode - Temperature Control

In Frozen mode, the controller maintains the return air temperature at setpoint, the yellow RETURN indicator light is
illuminated, and the default reading on the display window is the return temperature sensor (RTS) reading.
When the return air temperature enters the in-range temperature tolerance (Cd30), the green IN-RANGE light will
energize.
When CnF26 (Heat Lockout Temperature) is set to -10°C, frozen mode is active with setpoints below -10°C
(+14°F). When CnF26 is set to -5°C, frozen mode is active with setpoints below -5°C (+23°F).
When the system is in Frozen mode, the highest priority is given to bringing the container down to setpoint, the sys-
tem will remain in economized operation.
4.3.15 Frozen Steady State

Frozen cargos are not sensitive to minor temperature changes, and the frozen temperature control system takes
advantage of this to greatly improve the energy efficiency of the unit. Frozen range temperature control is accom-
plished by cycling the compressor on and off as the load demand requires.
Once the frozen setpoint is reached, the unit will transition to frozen steady state (economized operation).
4.3.16 Frozen Idle Mode

When temperature drops to setpoint minus 0.2°C (0.4°F) and the compressor has run for at least five minutes, the
unit will transition to the Frozen Idle mode. The compressor is turned off and the evaporator fans continue to run to
circulate air throughout the container. If temperature rises above setpoint +0.2°C, (0.4°F) the unit will transition back
to the frozen steady state mode.
Figure 4.8 Controller Operation - Frozen Mode
Frozen Mode
Controller Set Point at or BELOW ï10qC (+14qF),
or ï5qC (+23qF) optionally
+2.5qC
(+4.5qF)
Cooling,
Economized
+.20qC
Set Point
ï.20qC
Air Circulation
Falling Rising
Temperature Temperature
4–9 T-362
4.3.17 Frozen “Heat” Mode
If the temperature drops 10°C (18°F) below setpoint, the unit will transition to the Frozen “Heating” mode. The
evaporator fans are brought to high speed, and the heat from the fans is circulated through the container. The unit
will transition back to Frozen Steady State when the temperature rises back to the transition point.
4.3.18 Frozen Economy Mode

In order to activate Frozen Economy mode, a frozen setpoint temperature must be selected, and Cd34 (Economy
Mode) set to “ON.” When economy mode is active, the system will perform normal frozen mode operations except
that the entire refrigeration system, excluding the controller, will be turned off when the control temperature is less
than or equal to the setpoint -2°C (4°F).
After an off-cycle period of 60 minutes, the unit will turn on high speed evaporator fans for three minutes, and then
check the control temperature. If the control temperature is greater than or equal to the frozen setpoint +0.2°C
(0.4°F), the unit will restart the refrigeration system and continue to cool until the off-cycle temperature criteria are
met. If the control temperature is less than the frozen setpoint +0.2°C (0.4°F) the unit will turn off the evaporator
fans and restart another 60 minute off-cycle.
4.3.19 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation

a. When the return air temperature is above setpoint and decreasing, the unit will transition to economized
cooling with the condenser fan motor (CF), compressor motor (CH), economizer solenoid valve (ESV), low
speed evaporator fan motors (ES) energized and the white COOL light illuminated. (See Figure 4.9).
b. When the return air temperature decreases to a predetermined tolerance above setpoint, the green
INRANGE light is illuminated.
c. When the return air temperature decreases to 0.2°C (0.4°F) below setpoint, contacts TC, TS and TN are
opened to de-energize the compressor, economizer solenoid valve and condenser fan motor. The white
COOL light is also de-energized. The EEV will close.
d. The evaporator fan motors continue to run in low speed to circulate air throughout the container. The green
IN-RANGE light remains illuminated as long as the return air is within tolerance of setpoint.
e. If return air temperature drops to 10°C (18°F) or more below setpoint, the evaporator fans switch to high speed.
f. When the return air temperature increases to 0.2°C (0.4°F) above setpoint and three minutes have elapsed,
the EEV opens and contacts TC, TS and TN close to restart the compressor, open the ESV and restart the
condenser fan motor. The white COOL is illuminated.
Figure 4.9 Frozen Mode
ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
ST
F 24 VOLT POWER
HPS TC CH
IP-CM TN CF
TV EF ES
IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF
HTT TH HR
TS ESV
NOTE
The EEV and DUV are independently operated by the microprocessor. Complete schematics and leg-
ends are located in Section 8.
T-362 4–10
4.3.20 Defrost
Defrost is initiated to remove ice buildup from the evaporator coil which can obstruct air flow and reduce the cooling
capacity of the unit. The defrost cycle may consist of up to three distinct operations depending upon the reason for
the defrost or model number configuration. The first is de-icing of the coil, the second is defrost due to a probe
check cycle and the third is a snap freeze process based on the unit model configuration.
• De-icing the coil consists of removing power to the cooling components (compressor, evaporator fans, and con-
denser fan), closing the EEV, and turning on the heaters, which are located below the evaporator coil. During
normal operation, de-icing will continue until temperatures indicate that the ice on the coil has been removed,
proper air flow has been restored, and the unit is ready to control temperature efficiently.
• If defrost was initiated by the probe check logic, then the Probe Check is carried out after the completion of the
defrost cycle. A Probe Check is initiated only when there is an inaccuracy between the controller temperature
sensors.
• Snap Freeze allows the system to cool for a period of time after de-icing, with the evaporator fans turned off and
is only carried out if configured by model number. Snap-Freeze allows for the removal of latent de-icing heat
from the evaporator coils, and freezes any remaining moisture that might otherwise be blown into the container.
For more information on Probe Check refer to Section 5.11
4.3.21 Defrost Operation

Initiation of defrost is dependent on the state of the Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS). When the DTS senses a
temperature less than 10°C (50°F), the defrost options become active and the timer is engaged for the initiation of
the defrost cycle. The defrost time accumulates when the compressor is running. In the perishable mode this is the
same as real time as the compressor in general runs continuously. In frozen mode the actual time necessary to
count down to the next defrost will exceed the defrost interval depending on the compressor duty-cycle.
When the defrost mode is in the active state, defrost can be initiated when any one of the following additional con-
ditions become true:
1. Manually: While in the Defrost screen, when the Manual Defrost soft key is selected, if conditions will allow
for a defrost, a manual defrost is initiated. The Defrost Indicator light is lit, and the user is brought back to
the Main / Default screen.
While in the Defrost screen, when Manual Defrost soft key is selected, and conditions will NOT allow a
defrost, a pop up message screen appears.
2. Timer: The Defrost Interval Timer reaches the user selectable Interval. The user-selected intervals are 3, 6,
9, 12, 24 Hours, Off, AUTO, Pulse, or AUTO2; factory default is AUTO. Refer to Defrost Interval setting on
the Trip Settings screen.
a. Automatic defrost starts with an initial defrost at three hours and then adjusts the interval to the next
defrost based on the accumulation of ice on the evaporator coil. Following a start-up or after termination
of defrost, the time will not begin counting down until the DTS reading falls below 10°C (50°F). If the
reading of DTS rises above termination setting any time during the timer count down, the interval is reset
and the countdown starts over. The Auto defrost time is reset to three hours start time after every PTI ini-
tiation or trip start interval.
b. Fan Pulsing Logic is used to help prevent ice formation in the drain gutter and drain cup and ice buildup
in supply air channel by using the evaporator fans to blow the warm air onto these areas during unit
defrost. When cooling at lower set points, evaporator fan pulsing can be used during Defrost/De-ice
when the “Pulse” option is selected for the Defrost Interval setting on the Trip Settings screen. When
enabled, evaporator fan pulsing will occur based on the unit temperature set point and the Evap Fan
Pulsing Temp setting on the Trip Settings screen. QUEST II also pulses the evaporator fans during
Defrost/De-ice within a narrow perishable set point range. The logic for each evaporator fan pulsing fea-
ture is described below.
c. After a new Defrost Interval is selected, the previously selected Interval is used until the next defrost ter-
mination, the next time the DTS contacts are OPEN, or the next time power to the control is interrupted.
If the previous value or the new value is “OFF”, the newly selected value will be used immediately.
4–11 T-362
3. Probe Check: If defrost is initiated due to Probe Check immediately following the defrost cycle the evapora-
tion fans are started and run for eight minutes to stabilize the temperature throughout the container. A probe
check comparison is carried out at the end of the eight minute period if any sensor is found out of calibration.
At this time its alarm set is no longer used for control/reorder purposes.
4. Probe Check Logic: The logic determines that a Probe Check is necessary based on temperature values
currently reported by the supply and return probes
5. Delta T Logic: If the difference between return and supply air temperature (Delta T) becomes too great indi-
cating possible reduced airflow over the evaporator coil caused by ice buildup requiring a defrost.
a. In Perishable Pull Down - Delta T increases to greater than 12°C, and 90 minutes of compressor run
time have been recorded.
b. In Perishable Steady State – A baseline Delta T is recorded following the first defrost cycle after steady
state conditions are reached, (the unit is cooling, and the evaporator fans and heaters must remain in a
stable state for a period of five minutes). Defrost will be initiated if Delta T increases to greater than 4°C
above the baseline, and 90 minutes of compressor run time have been recorded.
c. In Frozen Mode - Defrost will be initiated if Delta T increases to greater than 16°C and 90 minutes of
compressor run time have been recorded.
When defrost is initiated, the controller closes the EEV, opens contacts TC, TN and TE (or TV) to de-energize the
compressor, condenser fan and evaporator fans.
The controller then closes contacts TH to supply power to the heaters. The orange DEFROST light and heat light
are illuminated and the COOL light is also de-energized.
Figure 4.10 Defrost
ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
ST
F 24 VOLT POWER
HPS TC PB
IP-CM TN CF
TV EF ES
IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF
HTT TH HR
TS ESV
The EEV and DUV are independently operated by the microprocessor. Complete schematics and legends are
located in Section 9.
Defrost will terminate when the DTS reading rises above one of two model number configurable options selection,
either an upper setting of 25.6°C (78°F) which is default or lower setting of 18°C (64°F). When the DTS reading
rises to the configured setting, the de-icing operation is terminated.
4.3.22 Defrost Related Settings
DTS Failure
When the return air temperature falls to 7°C (45°F), the controller ensures that the defrost temperature sensor
(DTS) reading has dropped to 10°C or below. If it has not, it indicates a failed DTS. A DTS failure alarm is triggered
and the defrost mode is operated by the return temperature sensor (RTS). Defrost will terminate after 1 hour.
If the DTS fails to reach is termination setting, the defrost terminate after 2 hours of operation.
T-362 4–12
Defrost Timer
If CnF23 is configured to “SAv” (save), then the value of the defrost interval timer will be saved at power down and
restored at power up. This option prevents short power interruptions from resetting an almost expired defrost inter-
val, and possibly delaying a needed defrost cycle. If the save option is not selected the defrost timer will re-initiate
and begin recounting.
If CnF11 is model number configured to OFF the operator will be allowed to choose “OFF” as a defrost interval
option.
If CnF64 is configured in the operator will be allowed to choose “PuLS” as a defrost interval option. For units oper-
ating with “PuLS” selected, defrost interval is determined by the unit temperature set point and the Evap Fan Puls-
ing Temp setting on the Trip Settings screen. When the unit temperature set point is equal to or less than the
Evaporator Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting, the defrost interval is set to 6 hours. Otherwise, the defrost interval is
determined using the Automatic Defrost Interval Determination logic. In either case, “PuLS” remains displayed in
this function select code.
If any Auto Pretrip sequence is initiated, the Defrost Interval setting will be set to ’AUTO’ unless CnF49 (OEM
Reset) is set to “Custom” AND CnF64 (Evaporator Fan Pulsing Logic) configuration variable is set to IN, in which
case the Defrost Interval setting on the Trip Settings screen will be set to “Pulse”.
If defrost does not terminate correctly and temperature reaches the set point of the Heat Termination Thermostat
(HTT) 54°C (130°F), the HTT will open to de-energize the heaters (AL059 & AL060). If the HTT does not open and
termination does not occur within two hours, the controller will terminate defrost. AL060 will be activated to inform
of a possible DTS failure.
Protection Modes of Operation
4.3.23 Evaporator Fan Operation

Opening of an evaporator fan internal protector will shut down the unit.
4.3.24 Failure Action
Function code Cd29 may be operator set to select the action the controller will take upon a system failure. The fac-
tory default is full system shutdown. Refer to Table 4–6.
4.3.25 Generator Protection
Function codes Cd31 (Stagger Start, Offset Time) and Cd32 (Current Limit) may be operator set to control the start
up sequence of multiple units and operating current draw. The factory default allows on demand starting (no delay)
of units and normal current draw. Refer to Table 4–6.
4.3.26 Compressor High Temperature Protection
The controller continuously monitors compressor discharge pressure and temperature, and suction pressure. If
discharge pressure or temperature rises above the allowed limit or suction pressure falls below the allowed limit,
the compressor will be cycled off and on every 3 minutes. Condenser and evaporator fans will continue to operate
during the compressor off cycle.
If high compressor dome temperature occurs, as measured by the CPDS, the controller will allow additional refrig-
erant to be released into the system in order to provide cooling to the evaporator coil and compressor dome. The
controller is alerted to high compressor dome temperatures via the CPDS when ambient temperature is greater
than 43.3°C (110°F), return air temperature is less than -17.5°C (0.5°F) and the compressor discharge temperature
is greater than 117.7°C (244°F).
Dome temperature control logic will disengage when return air temperature and ambient temperature return to
allowed limits or when the compressor turns off.
4.3.27 Compressor Low Pressure Protection
If the suction pressure low limit is triggered, the DUV will energize to raise the suction pressure.
4.3.28 Perishable Mode - System Pressure Regulation
In Perishable mode, system pressures may need to be regulated at ambient temperatures of 20°C (68°F) and
below. Once below this ambient temperature, the condenser fan may cycle on and off based on limits imposed for
discharge pressure. For extremely cold ambient temperatures, -18°C (0°F), heater cycling may occur within normal
system operation based on discharge pressure limits.
4–13 T-362
4.3.29 Condenser Fan Override
When CnF17 (Discharge Temperature Sensor) is set to “In” and CnF48 (Condenser Fan Switch Override) is set to
“On”, the condenser fan switch override logic is activated. If condenser cooling water pressure is sufficient to open
the water pressure switch (de-energizing the condenser fan) when water flow or pressure conditions are not main-
taining discharge temperature, the logic will energize the condenser fan as follows:
1. If the DUV is less than 80% open when the controller calls for it to be100% open, the condenser fan is ener-
gized. When the DUV is 100% open, the fan will de-energize.
2. If DPT reading is invalid or out of range (AL65), the condenser fan is energized and will remain energized
until system power is cycled.
3. If the system is running on condenser fan override and the high pressure switch opens, the condenser fan is
energized and will remain energized until the system power is cycled.
4.4 QUEST - CCPC

Compressor-Cycle Perishable Cooling (CCPC) is a method of temperature control used during steady-state perish-
able cooling that cycles the compressor on and off according to return air temperature.
To be eligible for steady-state control the unit must first complete a setpoint pulldown phase and a CCPC pulldown
phase:
• During setpoint pulldown, supply air temperature is controlled according to the unit’s nominal supply air set-
point.
• During CCPC pulldown, supply air temperature is lowered somewhat relative to the nominal setpoint. Evap-
orator fans are forced to operate at high speed.
Steady-state CCPC control maintains the same lowered supply air temperature that was used during CCPC pull-
down. The compressor cycles on and off according to return air high and low limits. Depending on the fan mode of
operation selected, the evaporator fans may be programmed to run at low speed some or all of the time according
to the control logic.
4.5 CONTROLLER ALARMS

Alarm display is an independent controller software function. If an operating parameter is outside of expected
range or a component does not return the correct signals back to the controller, an alarm is generated. A listing of
alarms is provided in Section 4.10.
The alarm philosophy balances the protection of the refrigeration unit and that of the refrigerated cargo. The action
taken when an error is detected always considers the survival of the cargo. Rechecks are made to confirm that an
error actually exists.
Some alarms requiring compressor shutdown have time delays before and after to try to keep the compressor on
line. An example is alarm code “LO,” (low main voltage), when a voltage drop of over 25% occurs, an indication is
given on the display, but the unit will continue to run.
When an Alarm Occurs:
• The red alarm light will illuminate for alarm code numbers 15, 17, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, and 27.
• If a detectable problem exists, its alarm code will be alternately displayed with the setpoint on the left display.
• The user should scroll through the alarm list to determine what alarms exist or have existed. Alarms must be
diagnosed and corrected before the Alarm List can be cleared.
To Display Alarm Codes:
1. While in the Default Display mode, press the ALARM LIST key. This accesses the Alarm List Display mode,
which displays any alarms archived in the alarm queue.
2. The alarm queue stores up to 16 alarms in the sequence in which they occurred. The user may scroll
through the list by pressing an ARROW key.
3. The left display will show “AL##,” where ## is the alarm number sequentially in the queue.
4. The right display will show the actual alarm code. “AA##” will display for an active alarm, where “##” is the
alarm code. Or “IA##” will display for an inactive alarm, see Section 4.10.
5. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the alarm list if any alarms are active.
T-362 4–14
6. “CLEAr” is displayed if all alarms are inactive. The alarm queue may then be cleared by pressing ENTER.
The alarm list will clear and “-----” will be displayed.
NOTICE
AL26 is active when none of the sensors are responding. Check the connector at the back of the
controller, if it is loose or unplugged, reconnect it, then run a pre-trip test (P5) to clear AL26.
4.6 PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSTICS

Pre-Trip Diagnostics is an independent controller function that suspends normal refrigeration controller activities
and provides preprogrammed test routines. The test routine can be run in Auto Mode, which automatically per-
forms a pre programmed sequence of tests, or Manual Mode, which allows the operator to select and run any of
the individual tests.
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
When the pre-trip key is pressed economy, dehumidification and Bulb Mode will be deactivated. At
the completion of the pre-trip test, economy, dehumidification and Bulb Mode must be reactivated.
A pre-trip test may be initiated by use of the keypad or via communication, but when initiated by communication the
controller will execute the entire battery of tests (auto mode).
At the end of a pre-trip test, the message “P,” “rSLts” (pretest results) will be displayed. Pressing ENTER will allow
the user to see the results for each of the sub-tests. The results will be displayed as “PASS” or “FAIL” for each test
run to completion.
A detailed description of the pre-trip tests and test codes is provided in Table 4–7. Detailed operating instructions
are provided in Section 5.10.
4.7 DATACORDER
4.7.1 Description
Carrier Transicold “DataCORDER” software is integrated into the controller and serves to eliminate the tempera-
ture recorder and paper chart. DataCORDER functions may be accessed by keypad selections and viewed on the
display module. The unit is also fitted with interrogation connections (see Figure 4.1) which may be used with the
Carrier Transicold DataReader to download data. A personal computer with Carrier Transicold DataLINE software
installed may also be used to download data and configure settings.
The DataCORDER consists of:
• Configuration Software
• Operational Software
• Data Storage Memory
• Real Time Clock (with internal battery backup)
• Six Thermistor Inputs
• Interrogation Connections
• Power Supply (battery pack)
The DataCORDER performs the following functions:
a. Logs data at 15, 30, 60 or 120 minute intervals and stores two years of data (based on one hour interval).
b. Records and displays alarms on the display module.
c. Records results of pre-trip testing.
4–15 T-362
d. Records DataCORDER and temperature control software generated data and events as follows:
• Container ID Change
• Software Upgrades
• Alarm Activity
• Battery Low (battery pack)
• Data Retrieval
• Defrost Start and End
• Dehumidification Start and End
• Power Loss (with and without battery pack)
• Power Up (with and without battery pack)
• Remote Probe Temperatures in the Container (USDA Cold treatment and Cargo probe recording)
• Return Air Temperature
• Setpoint Change
• Supply Air Temperature
• Real Time Clock Battery (Internal) Replacement
• Real Time Clock Modification
• Trip Start
• ISO Trip Header (When entered via Interrogation program)
• Economy Mode Start and End
• “Auto 1/Auto 2/Auto 3” Pre-Trip Start and End
• Bulb Mode Start
• Bulb Mode Changes
• Bulb Mode End
• USDA Trip Comment
• Humidification Start and End
• USDA Probe Calibration
• Fresh Air Vent Position
4.7.2 DataCORDER Software

The DataCORDER Software is subdivided into Operational Software, Configuration Software, and the Data Memory.
a. Operational Software
The Operational Software reads and interprets inputs for use by the Configuration Software. The inputs are labeled
Function Codes. Controller functions (see Table 4–8) which the operator may access to examine the current input
data or stored data. To access these codes, do the following:
1. Press the ALT. MODE and CODE SELECT keys.
2. Press an arrow key until the left window displays the desired code number. The right window will display the
value of this item for five seconds before returning to the normal display mode.
3. If a longer display time is desired, press the ENTER key to extend the display time to 30 seconds.
b. Configuration Software
The configuration software controls the recording and alarm functions of the DataCORDER. Reprogramming to the
factory-installed configuration is achieved via a configuration card. Changes to the unit DataCORDER configura-
tion may be made using the DataLINE interrogation software.
A list of the configuration variables is provided in Table 4–3. Descriptions of DataCORDER operation for each variable
setting are provided in the following paragraphs.
T-362 4–16
4.7.3 Sensor Configuration (dCF02)
Two modes of operation may be configured: Standard Mode and Generic Mode.
a. Standard Mode
In the Standard Mode, the user may configure the DataCORDER to record data using one of seven standard config-
urations. The seven standard configuration variables, with their descriptions, are listed in Table 4–4.
The inputs of the six thermistors (supply, return, USDA #1, #2, #3 and cargo probe) and the humidity sensor input
will be generated by the DataCORDER (see Figure 4.11).
NOTE
The DataCORDER software uses the supply and return recorder sensors (SRS, RRS). The tempera-
ture control software uses the supply and return temperature sensors (STS, RTS).
b. Generic Mode
The Generic Recording Mode allows user selection of the network data points to be recorded. The user may select
up to a total of eight data points for recording. Changing the configuration to generic and selecting which data
points to record may be done using the Carrier Transicold Data Retrieval Program. A list of the data points avail-
able for recording follows.
1. Control mode
2. Control temperature
3. Frequency
4. Humidity
5. Phase A current
6. Phase B current
7. Phase C current
8. Main voltage
9. Evaporator expansion valve percentage
10. Discrete outputs (Bit mapped - require special handling if used)
11. Discrete inputs (Bit mapped - require special handling if used)
12. Ambient sensor
13. Evaporator temperature sensor
14. Compressor discharge sensor
15. Return temperature sensor (RTS)
16. Supply temperature sensor (STS)
17. Defrost temperature sensor
18. Discharge pressure transducer
19. Suction pressure transducer
20. Condenser pressure transducer
21. Vent position sensor (VPS)
4.7.4 Logging Interval (dCF03)

The user may select four different time intervals between data recordings. Data is logged at exact intervals in
accordance with the real time clock. The clock is factory set at Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
4–17 T-362
4.7.5 Thermistor Format (dCF04)
The user may configure the format in which the thermistor readings are recorded. The short resolution is a 1 byte
format and the long resolution is a 2 byte format. The short requires less memory and records temperature with
variable resolutions depending on temperature range. The long records temperature in 0.01°C (0.02°F) steps for
the entire range.
Table 4–3 DataCORDER Configuration Variables

CONFIG TITLE DEFAULT OPTION
dCF01 (Future Use) -- --
dCF02 Sensor Configuration 2 2,5,6,9,54,64,94
dCF03 Logging Interval (Minutes) 60 15,30,60,120
dCF04 Thermistor Format Short Long
dCF05 Thermistor Sampling Type A A,b,C
dCF06 Controlled Atmosphere/Humidity Sampling A A,b
Type
dCF07 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 1 A Auto, On, Off
dCF10 Alarm Configuration Cargo Sensor A Auto, On, Off
T-362 4–18
Figure 4.11 Standard Configuration Download Report
Raw Data Report for ABC1234567

Jan 01, 2015 to Mar 01, 2015
System Configuration at the Time of Interrogation:
Interrogated On Mar 05, 2015
Extracted by DataLINE Rev 1.0.0
Controller Software: 5361

Controller Serial #: 04163552
Bill of Lading #: 1
Origin: Origin Date:
Destination: Discharge Date:
Comment: DataLINE Tool
Probe Calibration Readings: USDA1: 0.0 USDA2: 0.0 USDA3: 0.0 Cargo: 0.0
Temperature Units: Centigrade
________________________________________________________________________________________
Jan 01, 2015
Setpoint: 1.66, Container : Serial : 04189552
9 Sensors Logged at 15 Minute Interval
Sensor Format Resolution
Jan 05, 2015

Jan 03, 2015
Jan 04, 2015

Jan 01, 2015
Jan 02, 2015
4–19 T-362
Table 4–4 DataCORDER Standard Configurations
STANDARD CONFIG DESCRIPTION
2 sensors (dCF02=2) 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 humidity input
9 sensors (dCF02=9) Not Applicable
1 cargo probe (thermistor input)
1 humidity input
1 humidity input
4.7.6 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06)

Three types of data sampling are available: average, snapshot and USDA. When configured to average, the aver-
age of readings taken every minute over the recording period is recorded. When configured to snapshot, the sen-
sor reading at the log interval time is recorded. When USDA is configured, supply and return temperature readings
are averaged and the three USDA probe readings are snapshot.
4.7.7 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 - dCF10)

USDA and cargo probe alarms may be configured to OFF, ON or AUTO.
If a probe alarm is configured to OFF, the alarm for this probe is always disabled.
If a probe alarm is configured to ON, the associated alarm is always enabled.
If the probes are configured to AUTO, they act as a group. This function is designed to assist users who keep the
DataCORDER configured for USDA recording, but do not install the probes for every trip. If all the probes are dis-
connected, no alarms are activated. As soon as one of the probes is installed, all of the alarms are enabled and the
remaining probes that are not installed will give active alarm indications.
4.7.8 DataCORDER Power Up

The DataCORDER may be powered up in any one of four ways:
1. Normal AC power: The DataCORDER is powered up when the unit is turned on via the Stop-Start switch.
2. Controller DC battery pack power: If a battery pack is installed, the DataCORDER will power up for commu-
nication when an interrogation cable is plugged into an interrogation receptacle.
3. External DC battery pack power: A 12 volt battery pack may also be plugged into the back of the interroga-
tion cable, which is then plugged into an interrogation port. No controller battery pack is required with this
method.
4. Real Time Clock demand: If the DataCORDER is equipped with a charged battery pack and AC power is not
present, the DataCORDER will power up when the real time clock indicates that a data recording should
take place. When the DataCORDER is finished recording, it will power down.
T-362 4–20
During DataCORDER power-up, while using battery-pack power, the controller will perform a hardware voltage
check on the battery. If the hardware check passes, the controller will energize and perform a software battery volt-
age check before DataCORDER logging. If either test fails, the real time clock battery power-up will be disabled
until the next AC power cycle. Further DataCORDER temperature logging will be prohibited until that time.
An alarm will be generated when the battery voltage transitions from good to bad indicating that the battery pack
needs recharging. If the alarm condition persists for more than 24 hours on continuous AC power, it indicates that
the battery pack needs replacement.
4.7.9 Pre-Trip Data Recording

The DataCORDER will record the initiation of a pre-trip test (refer to Section 4.6) and the results of each test
included in pre-trip. The data is time-stamped and may be extracted via the Data Retrieval program. Refer to Table
4–9 for a description of the data stored in the DataCORDER for each corresponding pre-trip test.
4.7.10 DataCORDER Communications

Data retrieval from the DataCORDER can be accomplished by using the DataLINE, DataBANK Card, or a commu-
nications interface module.
NOTE
A DataLINE or a communications interface module display of Communication Failed is caused by
faulty data transfer between the DataCORDER and the data retrieval device. Common causes
include:
1. Bad cable or connection between DataCORDER and data retrieval device.

2. PC communication port(s) unavailable or mis-assigned.
Configuration identification for the models covered herein may be obtained on the Container Products Group Infor-
mation Center by authorized Carrier Transicold Service Centers.
a. DataLINE
The DataLINE software for a personal computer is supplied on CD. This software allows interrogation, configura-
tion variable assignment, screen view of the data, hard copy report generation, cold treatment probe calibration
and file management. Refer to Data Retrieval manual 62-10629 for a more detailed explanation of the DataLINE
interrogation software. The DataLINE manual may be found on the Internet at www.container.carrier.com.
b. DataBANK™ Card
The DataBANK™ card is a PCMCIA card that interfaces with the controller through the programming slot and can
download data at a fast rate. Files downloaded to DataBANK card files are accessible through an Omni PC Card
Drive. The files can then be viewed using the DataLINE software.
c. Communications Interface Module

The communications interface module is a slave module, which allows communication with a master central moni-
toring station. The module will respond to communication and return information over the main power line.
With a communications interface module installed, all functions and selectable features that are accessible at the
unit may be performed at the master station. Retrieval of all DataCORDER reports may also be performed. Refer to
the master system technical manual for further information.
4.7.11 USDA Cold Treatment

Sustained cold temperature has been employed as a postharvest method for the control of fruit flies and other
insect genera. The commodity, insect species, treatment temperatures and exposure times are found in sections
T107, T108, and T109 of the USDA Treatment Manual.
In response to the demand to replace fumigation with this environmentally sound process, Carrier has integrated
Cold Treatment capability into its microprocessor system. These units have the ability to maintain supply air tem-
perature within one quarter degree Celsius of set point and record minute changes in product temperature within
the DataCORDER memory, thus meeting USDA criteria. Information on USDA is provided in the following sub-
paragraphs.
4–21 T-362
a. USDA Recording
A special type of recording is used for USDA cold treatment purposes. Cold treatment recording requires
three remote temperature probes be placed at prescribed locations in the cargo. Provision is made to con-
nect these probes to the DataCORDER via receptacles located at the rear left-hand side of the unit. Four or
five receptacles are provided. The four 3-pin receptacles are for the probes. The 5-pin receptacle is the rear
connection for the Interrogator. The probe receptacles are sized to accept plugs with tricam coupling locking
devices. A label on the back panel of the unit shows which receptacle is used for each probe.
The standard DataCORDER report displays the supply and return air temperatures. The cold treatment
report displays USDA #1, #2, #3 and the supply and return air temperatures. Cold treatment recording is
backed up by a battery so recording can continue if AC power is lost.
b. USDA/ Message Trip Comment
A special feature in DataLINE allows the user to enter a USDA (or other) message in the header of a data
report. The maximum message length is 78 characters. Only one message will be recorded per day.
4.7.12 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure

The following is a summary of the steps required to initiate a USDA Cold Treatment.
If configured for USDA probes setup can be verified as follows (Refer to the DataLine User manual 62-10629
for more details):
1. Ensure the DataCorder is configured as follows:
a. DataCORDER is configured for USDA probes.
b. DataCORDER is set to logging interval for 60 minutes.
c. Sensor is set to “2 Averaged 3-USDA.”
d. The resolution is set to “Normal.”
4.7.13 DataCORDER Configuration Screen
2. Calibrate the three USDA probes by ice bathing the probes and performing the calibration function with the
DataLINE. This calibration procedure generates the probe offsets which are stored in the controller and
applied to the USDA sensors for use in generating sensor type reports. (Refer to Figure below)
Refer to the DataLine User manual 62-10629 for more details.
T-362 4–22
Figure 4.12 DataCorder Probe Calibration Screen
3. Pre-cool the container to the treatment temperature or below.
4. Install the DataCORDER module battery pack (if not already installed).
5. Place the three probes. Refer to USDA Treatment Manual for directions on placement of probes in fruit and
probe locations in container.
Sensor 1 Place the first sensor, labeled USDA1, in a box at the top of the stack of the fruit near-
est to the air return intake.
Sensor 2 Place the second sensor, labeled USDA2, slightly aft of the middle of the container,
halfway between the top and bottom of the stack.
Sensor 3 Place the third sensor, labeled USDA3, one pallet stack in from the doors of the con-
tainer, halfway between the top and bottom of the stack.
6. To initiate USDA recording, connect the personal computer and Enter ISO header information using the
DataLINE software. (Refer to figure below and DataCorder Alarms Section)
a. Enter ISO header information.
b. Enter a trip comment if desired.
Figure 4.13 DataCorder Probe Calibration Screen
4–23 T-362
c.Using the System Tools screen in the DataLine software perform a “trip start.” (Refer to figure below)
Figure 4.14 DataCorder Systems Tool Screen
4.7.14 DataCORDER Alarms

The alarm display is an independent DataCORDER function. If an operating parameter is outside of the expected
range or a component does not return the correct values to the DataCORDER, an alarm is generated. The Data-
CORDER contains a buffer of up to eight alarms. A listing of the DataCORDER alarms is provided in Table 4–10.
Refer to Section 4.7.7 for configuration information.
Displaying Alarm Codes:
1. While in the Default Display Mode, press the ALT. MODE&ALARMLIST keys. This accesses the Data-
CORDER Alarm List Display Mode, which displays any alarms stored in the alarm queue.
2. To scroll to the end of the alarm list, press the UP ARROW. Depressing the DOWN ARROW key will scroll
the list backward.
3. The left display will show “AL#” where # is the alarms number in the queue. The right display will show
“AA##,” if the alarm is active, where ## is the alarm number. “IA##,” will show if the alarm is inactive
4. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the alarm list if any alarms are active. “CLEAr” is displayed if all the
alarms in the list are inactive.
5. If no alarms are active, the alarm queue may be cleared. The exception to this rule is the DataCORDER
alarm queue Full alarm (AL91), which does not have to be inactive in order to clear the alarm list. To clear
the alarm list:
a. Press the ALT. MODE & ALARM LIST keys.
b. Press the UP/DOWN ARROW key until “CLEAr” is displayed.
c. Press the ENTER key. The alarm list will clear and “-----” will be displayed.
d. Press the ALARM LIST key. “AL” will show on the left display and “-----” on the right display when there
are no alarms in the list.
e. Upon clearing of the alarm queue, the alarm light will be turned off.
T-362 4–24
4.7.15 ISO Trip Header
DataLINE provides the user with an interface to view/ modify current settings of the ISO trip header through the
ISO Trip Header screen.
The ISO Trip Header screen is displayed when the user clicks on the “ISO Trip Header” button in the “Trip Func-
tions” Group Box on the System Tools screen.
F9 function - Provides the user with a shortcut for manually triggering the refresh operation. Before sending modi-
fied parameter values, the user must ensure that a successful connection is established with the controller.
If the connection is established with the DataCORDER, the current contents of the ISO Trip Header from the Data-
CORDER will be displayed in each field. If the connection is not established with the DataCORDER, all fields on
the screen will be displayed as “Xs.” If at any time during the display of the ISO Trip Header screen the connection
is not established or is lost, the user is alerted to the status of the connection.
After modifying the values and ensuring a successful connection has been made with the DataCORDER, click on
the “Send” button to send the modified parameter values.
The maximum allowed length of the ISO Trip Header is 128 characters. If the user tries to refresh the screen or
close the utility without sending the changes made on the screen to the DataCORDER, the user is alerted with a
message.
4.8 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION VARIABLES
Table 4–5 Controller Configuration Variables

CnF02 Evaporator Fan Speed dS (Dual) SS (Single)
CnF03 Control Temperature Sensors FOUr duAL
CnF04 Enable Dehumidification On OFF
CnF08 Evaporator Motor Type 1Ph 3Ph
CnF09 Refrigerant Type r134a r744
CnF11 Defrost “Off” Selection noOFF OFF
CnF15 Enable Discharge Temperature Sensor Out In
CnF16 Enable DataCORDER On (Yes) (Not Allowed)
CnF17 Enable Discharge Pressure Sensor Out (No) In (Yes)
CnF18 Heater Type Old (Low Watt) nEW (High Watt)
CnF20 Enable Suction Pressure Transducer Out (No) In (Yes)
CnF22 Economy Mode OFF Std, Full
CnF23 Enable Defrost Interval Save noSAv SAv
CnF24 Enable Long Pre-Trip Test Series Auto Auto2, Auto 3
CnF25 Enable Pre-Trip Data Recording rSLtS dAtA
CnF26 Heat Lockout Temperature Set to -10C Set to -5C
CnF27 Enable Suction Temperature Sensor Out In
CnF28 Enable Bulb Mode NOr bULb
CnF31 Probe Check SPEC Std
CnF32 Enable Single Evaporator Operation 2EF0 (Not Allowed)
CnF33 Enable Snap Freeze OFF SnAP
CnF34 Temperature Unit Display nOth F
CnF37 Electronic Chart Probe rEtUR SUPPL, bOth
4–25 T-362
Table 4–5 Controller Configuration Variables (Continued)
CnF41 Enable Low DTT Setting Out In
CnF44 Autoslide Enable Out LO, UP
CnF45 Low Humidity Enabled Out In
CnF46 Quench / Liquid Injection Valve Type nO=0=no nC=1=nc
CnF47 Vent Position OFF UP, LOW, CUStOM
CnF49 OEM Reset Option OFF 0-off,1-std, 2-spec,3-cust
CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Interface 0-out 1-in
CnF51 Timed Defrost Disable 0-out 1-in
CnF52 Oil Return Algorithm 0-out 1-in
CnF53 Water Cool Oil Return Logic 0-out 1-in
CnF55 TXV Boost Relay 0-out 1-in
CnF56 TXV Boost Circuit 0-out 1-in
CnF57 PWM Compressor Control 0-out 1-in
CnF59 Electronic Evaporator Expansion Valve 0-none 1-EC, 2-KE, 3-NA
CnF61 ACT ASC Control Enable 0-out 1-in
CnF62 Extended Temperature Control Enable 0-out 1-in
CnF63 CCPC Pre-Trip / Tripstart Default State 0-on 1-off
CnF64 Enable Fan Pulsing Logic 0-in 1-out
CnF66 High Speed Evaporator Fan Option 0-off 1-on
CnF67 Air Heaters 0-out 1-in
CnF68 Enable Default Pulsing Temperature 0-out 1-in
CnF70 Enable XtendFRESH Logic 0-out 1-in
CnF71 XtendFRESH Pre-Trip / Trip Start Default State 0-off 1-on
CnF74 RTD Pretrip / Tripstart Default State 0-off 1-on
CnF76 RTD Pretrip / Tripstart Enable 0-out 1-in
CnF78 XtendFRESH Scrubber Output Available 0-out 1-in
Note: Configuration numbers not listed are not used in this application. These items may appear when loading configuration
software to the controller but changes will not be recognized by the controller programming.
T-362 4–26
4.9 CONTROLLER FUNCTION CODES
Table 4–6 Controller Function Codes

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION
NOTICE
Note: If the function is not applicable, the display will read “-----”
Display Only Functions - Cd01 through Cd26 are display only functions.
Display Only Functions
Cd01 Digital Unloader Displays the DUV percent closed. The right display reads 100% when the valve
Valve Closed (%) is fully closed. The valve will usually be at 10% on start up of the unit except in
very high ambient temperatures.
Cd03 Compressor Motor The current sensor measures current draw in lines L1 & L2 by all of the high volt-
Current age components. It also measures current draw in compressor motor leg T3. The
compressor leg T3 current is displayed.
Cd04 Line Current, The current sensor measures current on two legs. The third unmeasured leg is
Phase A calculated based on a current algorithm. The current measured is used for con-
trol and diagnostic purposes. For control processing, the highest of the Phase A
Line Current, and B current values is used for current limiting purposes. For diagnostic pro-
Cd05 Phase B cessing, the current draws are used to monitor component energization.When-
ever a heater or a motor is turned ON or OFF, the current draw increase/
Line Current, reduction for that activity is measured. The current draw is then tested to deter-
Cd06 Phase C mine if it falls within the expected range of values for the component. Failure of
this test will result in a pre-trip failure or a control alarm indication.
Cd07 Main Power Voltage The main supply voltage is displayed.
Cd08 Main Power The value of the main power frequency is displayed in Hertz. The frequency dis-
Frequency played will be halved if either fuse F1 or F2 is bad (alarm code AL21).
Cd09 Ambient Temperature The ambient sensor reading is displayed.
Cd10 Evaporator Tempera- Evaporator temperature sensor reading is shown on the right display.
ture Sensor
Cd11 Compressor Discharge Compressor discharge temperature sensor reading, using compressor dome
Temperature temperature, is displayed.
Cd12 Compressor Suction Reading for evaporator pressure transducer (EPT) is shown on the left display;
Pressure Press ENTER at Cd12 to show reading for compressor suction port pressure on
right display.
Cd14 Compressor Discharge Compressor discharges pressure transducer reading is displayed.
Pressure
Cd15 Digital Unloader Valve The status of the valve is displayed (Open - Closed).
Cd16 Compressor Motor This code displays the compressor motor hours. User can view unit run time by
Hour Meter/Unit Run pressing the ENTER key while in Cd16. Total hours are recorded in increments
Time Hour Meter of 10 hours (i.e., 3000 hours is displayed as 300).
The Compressor Motor Hour Meter display can be reset to 0 by pressing and
holding the ENTER key for 5 seconds. The Unit Run Time Hour Meter cannot be
reset.
Cd17 Relative Humidity % Humidity sensor reading is displayed. This code displays the relative humidity,
as a percent value.
Cd18 Software Revision # The software revision number is displayed.
4–27 T-362
Table 4–6 Controller Function Codes (Continued)
Cd19 Battery Check This code checks the Controller/DataCORDER battery pack. While the test is
running, “btest” will flash on the right display, followed by the result. “PASS” will
be displayed for battery voltages greater than 7.0 volts. “FAIL” will be displayed
for battery voltages between 4.5 and 7.0 volts, and “-----” will be displayed for bat-
tery voltages less than 4.5 volts. After the result is displayed for four seconds,
“btest” will again be displayed, and the user may continue to scroll through the
various codes.
Cd20 Config/Model # This code indicates the dash number of the model for which the Controller is con-
figured (i.e., if the unit is a 69NT40-551-100, the display will show “51100”). To
display controller configuration database information, press ENTER. Values in
“CFYYMMDD” format are displayed if the controller was configured with a con-
figuration card or with a valid OEM serial port configuration update; YYMMDD
represents the publication date of the model configuration database.
Cd21 Capacity Mode The mode of operation is displayed (Unloaded - Standard - Economized).
Cd22 Compressor State The status of the compressor is displayed (OFF, On).
Cd23 Evaporator Fan Displays the current evaporator fan state (OFF, LOW, HIGH).
Cd25 Compressor Run This code displays the time remaining until the unit goes into defrost (in tenths of
Time Remaining an hour). This value is based on the actual accumulated compressor running
Until Defrost time.
Cd26 Defrost Temperature Defrost temperature sensor reading is displayed.
Sensor Reading
Configurable Functions - Cd27 through Cd37 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd27 Defrost Interval This is the desired period of time between defrost cycles. Factory default is “AU-
(Hours or Automatic) TO”. Refer to Section NO TAG for information on Defrost Interval.
CnF11 determines whether the operator will be allowed to chose “OFF” as a de-
frost interval option.
CnF64 determines whether the operator will be allowed to choose “PuLS” as a
defrost interval option. For units operating with “PuLS” selected, defrost interval
is determined by the unit temperature setpoint and the Evaporator Fan Pulsing
Temperature Setting (Cd60). When the unit temperature setpoint is equal to or
less than the Evaporator Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting, the defrost interval is
set to 6 hours. Otherwise, the defrost interval is determined using the Automatic
Defrost Interval Determination logic. In either case, “PuLS” remains displayed in
this function select code.
After a new Defrost Interval is selected, the previously selected Interval is used
until the next defrost termination, the next time the DTT contacts are OPEN, or
the next time power to the control is interrupted. If the previous value or the new
value is “OFF”, the newly selected value will be used immediately.
If any Auto Pre-trip sequence is initiated, Cd27 will be set to ‘AUTO’ unless
CnF49 (OEM Reset) is set to “Custom” AND CnF64 (Evaporator Fan Pulsing
Logic) configuration variable is set to IN, in which case Cd27 will be set to
“PuLS”.
Cd28 Temperature Units This code determines the temperature units (C or F) that will be used for all tem-
(Degrees C or perature displays. The user selects C or F by selecting function code Cd28 and
Degrees F) pushing the ENTER key. The factory default value is Celsius units. This function
code will display “-----” if CnF34 is set to F.
T-362 4–28
Cd29 Failure Action (Mode) If all of the control sensors are out of range (alarm code AL26) or there is a probe
circuit calibration failure (alarm code AL27), the unit will enter the shutdown state
defined by this setting. The user selects one of four possible actions as follows:
A - Full Cooling (Compressor is on, economized operation.)
b - Partial Cooling (Compressor is on, standard operation.)
C - Evaporator Fan Only (Evaporator fans on high speed, not applicable with fro-
zen setpoints.)
d - Full System Shutdown - Factory Default (Shut down every component in the
unit.)
Cd30 In-Range Tolerance The in-range tolerance will determine the temperature band around the setpoint
which will be designated as in-range.
For normal temperature control, control temperature is considered in range if it
is within setpoint in-range Tolerance. There are four possible values:
1 = +/- 0.5°C (+/-0.9°F)
2 = +/- 1.0°C (+/-1.8°F)
3 = +/- 1.5°C (+/-2.7°F)
4 = +/- 2.0°C (+/-3.6°F) - Factory Default
If the control temperature is in-range, the green IN-RANGE light will be illuminat-
ed.
In-range tolerance shall be set to +/- 2.0°C upon activation of dehumidification or
Bulb Mode (Cd33, Cd35, Cd48).
When CCPC is actively controlling, in-range tolerance is not considered.
“-----” will be displayed whenever Dehumidification or Bulb Mode is enabled or
when CCPC with six hour re-activation is actively controlling.
“-----” will be displayed whenever Frozen Economy Mode is operating.
Cd31 Stagger Start Offset The stagger start offset time is the amount of time that the unit will delay at start-
Time (Seconds) up, thus allowing multiple units to stagger their control initiation when all units are
powered up together. The eight possible offset values are 0 (Factory Default), 3,
6, 9, 12, 15, 18 or 21 seconds.
Cd32 Current Limit (Am- The current limit is the maximum current draw allowed on any phase at any time.
peres) Limiting the unit’s current reduces the load on the main power supply. When de-
sirable, the limit can be lowered. Note, however, that capacity is also reduced.
The five values for 460 VAC operation are: 15, 17, 19, 21, or 23 amperes. The
factory default setting is 21 amperes.
Cd33 Humidity Setpoint This is the value in percent to which the system will dehumidify or humidify.
There are configuration variables that determine whether dehumidification/hu-
midification capabilities are installed. In the Test Mode, the setpoint will be tem-
porarily set to 1%, allowing the test of dehumidification. After 5minutes, the
normal setpoint is restored. If unit is configured for HUMIDIFICATIONMODE
then selection of a setpoint greater than 75% will activate humidification, and a
setpoint less than or equal to 75% will activate dehumidification. If the unit is con-
figured for dehumidification only, then the entire setpoint range will apply to de-
humidification. If Pre-trip is initiated, this value will be set to “OFF” automatically.
(Replaced by Cd48 interface if CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Interface is active.)
Cd34 Economy Mode (On- The current state of the Economy Mode option, “-----”, On, or Off. CnF22 deter-
Off) mines whether Economy Mode offered. Economy Mode is a user selectable
mode of operation provided for power saving purposes.
4–29 T-362
Cd35 Bulb Mode The current state of the Bulb Mode option, “-----”, nOr, or bULb.
(Replaced by Cd48 if CnF50, Enhanced Bulb Mode, is active.)
Bulb Mode is an extension of dehumidification control (Cd33). If dehumidification
(CnF04) is set to “Off,” Cd35 will display “Nor” and the user will be unable to
change it. CnF28 determines whether the Bulb Mode selection is offered.
After a dehumidification setpoint has been selected and entered for code Cd33,
the user may then change Cd35 to “bulb.” After Bulb Mode has been selected
and entered, the user may then utilize function codes Cd36 and Cd37 to make
the desired changes.
Cd36 Evaporator Fan This is the desired evaporator fan speed for use during the bulb Dehumidification
Speed Select and Humidification Mode option.
(Replaced by Cd48 if CnF50, Enhanced Bulb Mode, is active.)
This code is enabled only if in the Dehumidification Mode (Cd33) and Bulb Mode
(Cd35) has been set to “bulb.” If these conditions are not met, “alt” will be dis-
played (indicating that the evaporator fans will alternate their speed) and the dis-
play cannot be changed.
If a dehumidification setpoint has been selected along with Bulb Mode then “alt”
may be selected for alternating speed, “Lo” for low speed evaporator fan only, or
“Hi” for high speed evaporator fan only.
If a setting other than “alt” has been selected and Bulb Mode is deactivated in
any manner, then selection reverts back to “alt.”
Cd37 Variable DTT Setting This is the variable defrost termination thermostat setting to be used with the op-
(Bulb Mode) tional Bulb Mode functionality. This item is only displayed if the Bulb Mode option
is configured on.
(Replaced by Cd48 interface if CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Interface is active.)
Cd38 Secondary Supply Cd38 will display the current supply recorder sensor (SRS) reading for units con-
Temperature Sensor figured for four probes. If the unit is configured with a DataCORDER, Cd38 will
display “-----.” If the DataCORDER suffers a failure, (AL55) Cd38 will display the
supply recorder sensor reading.
Cd39 Secondary Return Cd39 will display the current return recorder sensor (RRS) reading for units con-
Temperature Sensor figured for four probes. If the unit is configured with a DataCORDER, Cd39 will
display “-----.” If the DataCORDER suffers a failure, (AL55) Cd39 will display the
return recorder sensor reading.
Cd40 Container If a valid container id exists, the default display for Cd40 will be “cd40_XXXXX”
Identification where “XXXXX” is the 5th character through the 9th character of the container id.
Number Pressing the Enter key on Cd40 will display “id_YYYYYYY” where “YYYYYYY”
is the 5th character to the 11th character of the container id.
If no valid container id exists or the container id is blank, the default display will
have Cd40 on the left display and the right display will alternate between “_nEEd”
and “___id”. Pressing the enter key while on Cd40 in the state will prompt the Set
Id Interface.
On start up if the container id is not valid, Cd40 will be brought up on the display
for the first minute of power up. This can be left by either entering a container id
or leaving the code select normally.
Cd40 is configured at commissioning to read a valid container identification num-
ber. The reading will not display alpha characters; only the numeric portion of the
number will display.
Cd41 Valve Override SERVICE FUNCTION: This code is used for troubleshooting, and allows manual
positioning of the economizer solenoid valve, electronic expansion valve, and
digital unloader valve. Provides readings such as: Percent Capacity, EEV, Ca-
pacity Mode, LIV and DUV. Refer to Section 7.25 for operating instructions.
T-362 4–30
Configurable Functions - Cd43 is a user-selectable function. The operator can change the value of this function
to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd43 eAutoFresh Mode Cd43 is a user selectable mode of operation that allows the opening and closing
of a mechanical air vent door via a stepper motor. These selection modes are as
follows:
OFF - Air makeup vent will remain closed.
USER - Allows for manual selection of the setting.
DELAY -The opening of the door is based on selected time, return temperature
and flow rate (percent opened).
gASLM - The opening is based percent open and CO2 and O2 selectable limits
(LM). This selection is only active if the unit has a CO2 sensor.
TEST / CAL (CO2 sensor option units only) - The door will fully open and close
to allow the user to inspect its operation. If CAL is selected, the controller will zero
calibrate the CO2 sensor input.
Cd43 XtendFRESH Mode Cd43 has three selectable modes of operation:
FRESH - All XtendFRESH operations are enabled and setpoints for CO2 and O2
can be edited.
OFF - All XtendFRESH operations are disabled.
TEST - the operator has the ability to test operation of mechanical components,
test and calibrate the CO2 sensors and verify the validity of the O2 sensor.
Display Only Function - Cd44 is a display only function.
Cd44 eAutoFresh Values / Cd44 displays the eAutoFresh CO2 and O2 values (CO2 and O2) and CO2 and
CO2 Sensor Status O2 limits (CO2 LIM and O2 LIM), respectively.
This function code will be dashed if CO2 sensor is not detected, and a sensor is
not expected (didn’t have one previously).
This function code will display “ChECK” if a CO2 sensor has not been auto-de-
tected at the most recent power-up and was detected at a previous power-up. If
“ChECK” is displayed and the ENTER key is pressed, “SEnSr” is displayed with
the choices of “YES” and “no”:
“YES” – sensor should be remembered as detected (present)
“no” – sensor should not be remembered as being detected (not present)
Cd44 XtendFRESH Values Cd44 allows the user to view the following XtendFRESH values: CO2 setpoint,
CO2 percentage, O2 setpoint, O2 percentage, and O2 voltage.
For the CO2 setpoint, the range is from 0 to 19% in 1% increments with a default
setting of 5%. For the O2 setpoint, the range is from 3% to 21% in 1% increments
with a default setting of 10%.
Cd45 Vent Position Sensor Values: 0 to 240 for UPPER / 0 to 225 for LOWER
(VPS) Position This function code will be dashed out if not configured for VPS.
When configured for VPS, Cd45 displays the current vent position in units of 5
CMH (units displayed as “CM”) or CFM (units displayed as “CF”) depending on
the selection of Cd46 (Airflow display units), Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or the press-
ing of the deg C/F key.
Cd45 will display whenever the control detects movement via the sensor unless
AL50 is active. Cd45 will display for 30 seconds, then time out and return to the
normal display mode.
4–31 T-362
Cd46 Airflow Display Units Selects the airflow units to be displayed by Cd45 if configured for Vent Position
Sensor or displayed by “USER/FLO” under Cd43 if configured for Autoslide.
CF = Cubic Feet per Minute
CM = Cubic Meters per Hour
bOth = Displays CF or CM depending on the setting of Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or
the pressing of the degree C/F key.
Cd47 Variable Economy Used when Economy Mode (CnF22) is set to 3-cust. Display will show “----” when
Temperature Setting the unit is not configured for Economy Mode.
When the unit has a perishable setpoint and Economy Mode is active, at the start
of each cooling or heating cycle, high speed evaporator fans will run for 3 min-
utes. After three minutes, the evaporator fans will be switched to low speed any
time that the supply temperature is within +/- 0.25°C of the setpoint and the return
temperature is less than or equal to the supply temperature + the user selected
Cd47 (values are 0.5°C - 4.0°C, default is 3.0°C).
Cd48 Dehumidification / Initially Cd48 will display current dehumidification-mode; bUlb - bulb cargo mode,
Bulb Cargo Mode dEhUM - normal dehumidification, or OFF - off. This display is steady.
Parameter Selection Pressing ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of parameter
selection menus (mode, setpoint, evaporator speed, DTT setting). Pressing EN-
TER key in any parameter selection menu commits to selection of the currently
displayed parameter and causes the interface to descend into the next parame-
ter selection menu. All parameter selection menus alternate between a blank dis-
play and the current selection in the right hand display.
Pressing CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current selection
activity and ascends back up to the next higher selection menu (or to Cd48 dis-
play mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds the interface reverts to
normal system display and the current selection menu is cancelled, but any pre-
viously committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration op-
tions and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Whenever any pre-trip test is initiated, dehumidification-mode goes to OFF.
Whenever dehumidification-mode goes to OFF:
• Dehumidification control setpoint goes to0%RHinternally but will then initialize to
95% RH when dehumidification-mode leaves OFF.
• Evaporator speed select goes to Alt for units without PWM Compressor Control
(Cnf57 = Out), Evaporator speed select goes to Hi for units with PWM Compres-
sor Control (Cnf57 = In).
• DTT setting goes to 25.6_C or 18.0_C, depending on Cnf41.
Whenever dehumidification-mode is set to bUlb, DTT setting goes to 18.0°C if it
had been set higher.
Whenever dehumidification-mode is set to dEhUM, DTT setting goes to 25.6°C
or 18.0°C, depending on Cnf41.
For units without PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = Out):
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set below 65% RH evaporator
speed select goes to LO if it had been set to Hi.
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set above 64% RH evaporator
speed select goes to Alt if it had been set to LO.
For units with PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = In):
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set below 60% RH, the evaporator
fan speed is set to LO, the user has the ability to set the evaporator fan speed to
Hi via the keypad.
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set equal to or above 60% RH, the
evaporator fan speed is set to Hi, the user has the ability to set the evaporator fan
speed to LO via the keypad.
T-362 4–32
Display Only Function - Cd49 is a display only function.
Cd49 Days Since Last Displays the number of days since last successful pre-trip sequence.
Successful Pre-Trip Press ENTER to view the number of days since the last successful pre-trip for
Auto1, Auto2, and Auto2 in sequence.
Press CODE SELECT to step back through the list and ultimately to exit the
Cd49 display.
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.Cd50
Cd50 CCPC Disabled ”OFF” = disabled.
”On” = enabled.
”SEtPt” = suspended by setpoint too low.
”CAHUM” = suspended by CA or humidity control.
”ACt” = suspended by ACT active.
”FAIL” = all return temperature probe failure for CCPC.
”PrtrP” = pre-trip active.
”C LIM” = suspended by cool limit logic.
”PULL” = pulldown active.
“ALArM ” = suspended by shutdown alarm
Press enter, arrow keys, and then enter to select “OFF” or “On”.
If “On” is selected, CCPC operation may be suspended as indicated by one of
the suspension codes listed above. If CCPC is not “OFF” and is not suspended,
“On” will be displayed.
Cd51 Automatic Cold Automatic Cold Treatment (ACT) mode:
Treatment Cd51 increments of (1 day)_(1hr), Display: default “0_0 “
Parameter Selection “done” mm-dd this will be display is ACT has completed
“ACt” value “On” “OFF” or “----“Display /Select: default “OFF“
“trEAt” value °C / °F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default “0.0°C“
“DAyS” value “0 – 99” increments of 1 Display/Select: default “0”
“ProbE” value Probe positions ex ’1 2 _ 4’ ’1 _ 3 _’ Display: default “---- “
“SPnEW” value °C / °F on 0.1° increments Display/Select: default “10.0°C “
Initially Cd51 will display current countdown timer increments of (1 day)_(1hr),
default “0_0.
Refer to Section 5.14 for procedure to set ACT using Cd51.
Pressing ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of parameter
selection menus (act, treat, days, probe and spnew setting).
Pressing ENTER key in any of the parameter selection menus commits to selec-
tion of the currently displayed parameter and causes the interface to descend
into the next parameter selection menu. All parameter selection menus alternate
between a blank display and the current selection in the right hand display.
Parameter with the exception of “Act” may not be altered if Cd51 is re-entered if
“Act” is “On”. When ACT has completed including reaching the new setpoint “do-
ne” on the left display and the MONTH DAY of completion on the right display
will be displayed as the second entry in the menu. Turning ACT off clears this
entry. This action also resets Cd51 to initial time remaining. ACT must then be
turned on to view or modify the additional parameters.
Whenever any auto pre-trip test or Trip Start is initiated, ACT mode goes to OFF.
4–33 T-362
Cd53 Automatic Setpoint Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC) Mode:
Change Mode Cd53 increments of (1 day)_(1hr), Display: default “0_0 “
Parameter Selection “done” mm-dd this will be display is ASC has completed
“ASC” value “On” “OFF” Display /Select: default “OFF“
“nSC” value “1 - 6” (This is the value “n” for the subsequent entries).
“SP (n-1)” value °C / °F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default
“10.0°C“
“DAY (n-1)” value “1 – 99” increments of 1 Display/Select: default “1“
“SP (n)” value °C / °F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default “10.0°C
Initially Cd53 will display current count down timer increments of (1 day)_(1hr),
default “0_0
Pressing ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of parameter
selection menus, (mode, act, treat, days, probe and spnew setting). Pressing
ENTER key in any of the parameter selection menus selects the currently dis-
played parameter and causes the interface to descend into the next parameter
selection menu. All parameter selection menus alternate between a blank dis-
play and the current selection in the right hand display.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration op-
tions and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Parameter with the exception of “ASC” may not be altered if Cd53 is re-entered
if “ASC” is “On”. When ASC has completed including reaching the last setpoint
“done” on the left display and the MONTH DAY of completion on the right display
will be displayed as the second entry in the menu. Turning ASC off clears this
entry. This action also resets Cd53 to initial time remaining. ASC must then be
turned on to view or modify the additional parameters.
Whenever any auto pre-trip test or Trip Start is initiated, ASC mode goes to OFF.
Cd54 Suction Port Superheat Reading for evaporator superheat (suction temperature minus suction saturation
/ Electronic Expansion temperature as calculated from suction pressure) is shown on the right display.
Valve Status Press ENTER at Cd54 to show reading for EEV position (in %) on left display.
Cd55 Discharge Superheat Cd55 will display discharge superheat (discharge temperature minus discharge
saturation temperature as calculated from discharge pressure) values in C /F as
calculated by the discharge temperature minus the discharge saturation tem-
perature as calculated from discharge pressure. “-----” will be displayed if selec-
tion is not valid.
T-362 4–34
Cd58 Water Pressure Cd58 will display “CLOSE” if the WPS or CFS switch contacts are closed or if
Switch / Condenser these options are not installed. “OPEn” is displayed when the WPS or CFS
Fan Switch State or switch contacts are open. When the WPS/CFS Override Logic is “TRUE”, the
Override Logic State right display will flash on all units.
NOTE:
1. This CLOSE/OPEn state displayed in this Code Select function only applies to
units that have the ability to detect the state of a WPS/CFS. This function should
not be relied upon to display the condition of the switch on units that don’t have
a WPS/CFS switch connected to ECG2 exclusively.
2. The right display will flash if the WPS/CFS Override Logic is TRUE on all units.
This is always the case, whether the unit has a WPS or CFS installed or not.
3. The ability of the WPS/CFS Override Logic to control the condenser fan is lim-
ited. It is not possible for this logic to control the fan on units that have the WPS
or CFS wired in series with the fan contactor. Units wired in this configuration can
indicate that the WPS/CFS Override Logic is active by flashing the right display,
however, the wiring will not allow for control of the condenser fan.
Cd59 Pump Down Logic Cd59 allows operation of the pump down logic control. The display will flash
between “STArT PdN” and “PrESS EnTEr”.
Upon entering Cd59 the operator will be required to acknowledge that they want to
initiate the pump down control. The display will flash between “STArT PdN” and
“PrESS EnTEr”. Once the decision to continue is confirmed pump down logic will be-
gin, and will take complete control of the unit until pump down either succeeds or
fails. This operation can not be halted once it begins without power cycling the unit.
After pump down logic has been initiated, the operator will be notified to close the
Liquid Line Valve, the display will flash between “CLOSE LLV” and “PrESS En-
TEr”. Once complete the display will read “P dN” to the left, and the current suc-
tion pressure to the right.
If the automatic pump down logic succeeds within 20 minutes, the unit will turn itself
off, and the display will notify the operator that pump down is complete by flashing
between “P dN DOnE” and “SHUT OFF”. The operator must then shut off the unit.
If the automatic pump down logic does not complete within 20 minutes, the unit
will drop out of Cd59 and return to its previous control condition.
Cd60 Evaporator Fan Cd60 contains a selectable temperature range used to determine the engage-
Pulsing Temperature ment point of the Evaporator Fan Pulsing logic. Default setting is -18.1°C. The
Setting user may change the temperature by pressing enter, then scrolling to the desired
temperature using either arrow key. Press Enter to accept the change. The tem-
perature setting will be retained until either a pre-trip or Trip Start is initiated at
which time the temperature will set to the default setting.
“-----” will be displayed if CnF68 is configured OUT.
Cd62 High Speed Cd62 is used to force evaporator fan speed to high while temperature control is
Evaporator Fan being performed in the perishable setpoint range. When set to “On”, evaporator
Setting fans operate in high speed regardless of any other active option that can control
evaporator fan speed.
Following a power cycle, the state of the function select code is retained at its
state prior to the power cycle. If “On”, this function select code will be set to “OFF”
when any trip start occurs or any pre-trip test is initiated.
“-----” will be displayed if setpoint is in frozen range or if CnF66 is configured OFF.
Cd65 Run Time Diagnostics “-----” will be displayed if the Run Time Diagnostics function is not available for
Setting the current configuration. If the function is off, display "OFF". If the function is on,
display "ON".
4–35 T-362
Figure 4.15 Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence
Start
Troubleshooting
Unit does No Check Power Refer to CONNECT POWER

self test? Supply Section 5.2
Yes
Did
Evaporator No Check Power Refer to CONNECT POWER
fans start? Supply Section 5.2
Yes
Correct No Install Latest Refer to CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

software Software
version? Section 4.2
Revision
Yes
Unit Load correct

configured No Refer to Configuration Software (Variables)
unit
correctly? configuration Section 4.2.1
Yes
See alarm
Active Yes details & Refer to Controller Alarm Indications
Alarms? repair Section 4.5
No
Pass No Refer to Pre-trip Diagnostics

Pre-trip Correct
inspection? all faults Section 4.6
Yes
Operating No Correct Refer to REFRIGERATION SERVICE

pressures Refrigerant Section 7.3
normal? issue
Yes
Unit OK
T-362 4–36
4.10 CONTROLLER ALARM INDICATIONS
AL03 LOSS OF SUPERHEAT CONTROL

Cause: Superheat has remained below 1.66°C (3°F) degrees for five minutes continuously while compres-
sor running. Compressor drawing more than 2.0 amps, compressor pressure ratio is greater than
1.8, and Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) is at 0% open.
Component Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
Troubleshooting Check the operation of the EEV using Cd41.
Corrective Action Replace EEV if defective.
Component Evaporator Temperature Sensor(s) ETS & ETS1.
Troubleshooting Verify accuracy of temperature sensors. Refer to Sensor Checkout
Procedure Section 7.28.1.
Corrective Action Replace ETS or ETS1 if defective.
Component Evaporator Fans
Troubleshooting Confirm fans operating properly
Corrective Action Replace fan(s) if defective. Refer to Evaporator Fan Motor Assembly
Section 7.17.
AL05 MANUAL DEFROST SWITCH FAILURE

Cause: Controller has detected continuous Manual Defrost Switch activity for five minutes or more.
Component Keypad
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit.
Corrective Action Resetting the unit may correct problem, monitor the unit.
If the alarm reappears after 5 minutes, replace the keypad.
AL06 KEYPAD OR KEYPAD HARNESS FAIL

Cause: Controller has detected one of the keypad keys is continuously activity.
Component Keypad or Harness
If the alarm reappears, replace the keypad and harness.
AL07 FRESH AIR VENT OPEN

Cause: For units equipped with XtendFRESH and a Vent Position Sensor, the controller will monitor the
manual fresh air opening at a pre-determined time. If during this time the fresh air vent is open and
XtendFRESH is active, an alarm will be generated. If alarm is active, the controller monitors the
manual fresh air once per hour. Upon clearing the alarm, the controller goes back to monitoring at
the pre-determined time.
Component Vent Position Sensor (VPS)
Troubleshooting Manually reposition vent to 0% and confirm using Cd45. If Cd45 is
not reading 0%, perform a calibration of the panel.
Refer to Vent Position Sensor Service Section 7.29.
Corrective Action If unable to obtain a zero reading, replace the defective VPS.
If unit is loaded, ensure vent is closed. Note and replace VPS on next
PTI. The alarm will not affect the XtendFRESH system from operating
4–37 T-362
AL08 HIGH COMPRESSOR PRESSURE RATIO
Cause: Controller detects discharge pressure to suction pressure ratio is too high.
The controller will attempt to correct the situation by restarting the compressor.
Component Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate DPT pressure readings. Refer to Manifold Gauge
Set Section 7.2.
Corrective Action Replace DPT if defective.
AL09 O2 SENSOR FAILURE

Cause: Triggered anytime the O2 sensor reading is outside of the normal operation range, after an initial
signal was detected.
Component O2 Sensor, O2 Amplifier, Sensor Switch Module (if equipped)
Troubleshooting Check Cd44 and scroll down to 02V. The O2 sensor output will be dis-
played in millivolts (130mV to 4100mV).
Switch equipped: If voltage is not present at Cd44 and a sensor switch
module is installed, check for O2 voltage on the black wire connected to
the sensor switch module, connecting ground of meter to TP9. If the volt-
age is in the 130mV to 4.1V range, directly wire the black wire to KD04.
This may cause an AL07 depending on O2 reading but XtendFRESH will
operate normally. If no voltage on the black wire, proceed to next step.
Check wiring (refer to schematic), and correct if found mis-wired.
If O2 sensor is available, remove the upper fresh air panel and evaporator
motor and replace the sensor. If after replacing sensor AL09 continues, re-
place amplifier.
If parts are not available, turn XtendFRESH option off (Cd43) and open the
Manual Fresh Air Vent.
AL10 CO2 SENSOR FAILURE

Cause: Triggered anytime the CO2 sensor reading is outside of the normal operation range, after an initial
signal was detected.
Component CO2 Sensor.
Troubleshooting Check the voltage at MC5 to the ground pin on TP9. (1 - 4.7 vdc).
Check wiring (refer to schematic), and correct if found mis-wired.
If part is available, remove upper fresh air panel and evaporator mo-
tor; replace sensor. If no part is available, take no action and service
at next PTI. XtendFRESH will continuously run the scrubber. O2 lev-
el will be controlled with the opening and closing of the fresh air vents
as required.
Corrective Action The alarm is triggered off when voltage is within operating range.
AL14 PHASE SEQUENCE DETECT FAULT

Cause: Controller is unable to determine the correct phase relationship.
Component N/A
Component Wiring
T-362 4–38
AL14 PHASE SEQUENCE DETECT FAULT
Troubleshooting Check unit wiring.
Confirm pressure readings during start-up; suction pressure should
decrease and discharge pressure should increase.
Corrective Action Correct wiring.
Component Current Sensor
Troubleshooting Check Cd41, right most digit:
If display is 3 or 4, check compressor / sensor wiring.
If display is 5, the current sensor is defective.
Corrective Action Replace current sensor if defective.
AL16 COMPRESSOR CURRENT HIGH

Cause: Compressor current draw is over the calculated maximum for 10 minutes.
Component Current Sensor
Troubleshooting Compare Cd3 to actual measured current at wire T1-T2 or T3 going
to the compressor contactor. If there is a difference, determine
whether this is caused by current sensor or amp clamp tool.
Corrective Action Replace current sensor if defective.
Component Amperage is indeed too high.
Troubleshooting Confirm supply voltage / frequency is within specification and bal-
anced according to Electrical Data Section 3.3.
Corrective Action Correct power supply.
Component Operating Conditions
Troubleshooting Make sure system pressures are relevant to operating conditions.
Corrective Action Check air flow of condenser.
Check Refrigerant charge. Refer to Refrigeration System Service
Section 7.3.
Component Monitor Unit
Troubleshooting Alarm is display only the alarm may clear itself during operation.
Corrective Action If alarm remains active or is repetitive replace compressor at next
available opportunity. Refer to Compressor Service Section 7.9.
AL17 COMPRESSOR PRESSURE DELTA FAULT

Cause: Compressor has attempted to start in both directions and fails to generate sufficient pressure dif-
ferential between SPT and DPT.
Component N/A
Troubleshooting Controller will attempt to restart every 20 minutes and deactivate the
alarm if successful.
Corrective Action Resume normal operation.
Set Section 7.2.
Component Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
4–39 T-362
AL17 COMPRESSOR PRESSURE DELTA FAULT
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate SPT pressure readings. Refer to Manifold Gauge
Set Section 7.2.
Corrective Action Replace SPT if defective.
Component Monitor Unit
Troubleshooting Alarm is display only; the alarm may clear itself during operation.
Corrective Action If alarm remains active or is repetitive, replace compressor at next
available opportunity.
AL18 DISCHARGE PRESSURE HIGH

Cause: Discharge pressure is over the maximum for 10 minutes within the last hour.
Component Restrictions in the refrigeration system.
Troubleshooting Ensure Liquid Line Service Valve is fully open.
Corrective Action Open Liquid Line Service Valve as needed.
Component Filter Drier
Troubleshooting Check the filter drier. If it is iced up or very cold, it indicates that the
filter drier needs replacement.
Corrective Action Replace the filter drier if needed. Refer to Filter Drier Service Sec-
tion 7.14.
Component Condenser Fan
Troubleshooting Check Condenser Fan for proper operation.
Corrective Action Correct as required.
Set Section 7.2.
Component Non-condensables in the refrigeration system.
Troubleshooting With the unit off, allow system to stabilize to ambient temperature.
Check system pressure against Pressure Temperature Chart. Refer
to Table 7–4, Table 7–5.
Corrective Action Correct as required. Refer to Refrigerant Charge Section 7.7.1.
Component Refrigerant
Troubleshooting Check refrigerant level.
AL19 DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE HIGH

Cause: Discharge temperature exceeds 135°C (275°F) for 10 minutes within the last hour.
Component Restrictions in the refrigeration system.
Troubleshooting Ensure the Discharge Service Valve is fully open.
Corrective Action Open the Discharge Service Valve as needed.
Troubleshooting Check the unit for air flow restrictions.
Corrective Action Clean or remove any debris from coils.
T-362 4–40
AL19 DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE HIGH
Component Non-condensables in the refrigeration system.
Troubleshooting With the unit off allow system to stabilize to ambient temperature.
Check system pressure against Pressure Temperature Chart. Refer
to Table 7–4, Table 7–5.
Component Additional Alarms such as AL16, AL24.
Troubleshooting Check compressor operation.
Corrective Action If the alarm persists, it may indicate a failing compressor, replace the
compressor. Refer to Compressor Service Section 7.9.
AL20 CONTROL CONTACTOR FUSE (F3)

Cause: Control power fuse (F3A or F3B) is open.
Component Check F3A fuse.
Troubleshooting If fuse is open, check PA, PB, CH coils for short to ground.
Corrective Action If short is found, replace the defective coil.
Replace the fuse.
Component Check F3B fuse.
Troubleshooting If fuse is open, check ESV coil resistance at TP7 to TP9. If short to
ground, or if resistance is less than 4 ohms, coil is defective.
Check CF, ES, EF, HR coils for short to ground. If short is found, coil
is defective.
Corrective Action Replace the defective coil.
Replace the fuse.
Component Check Voltage at QC1.
Troubleshooting If voltage is present, it indicates a defective microprocessor.
Corrective Action Refer to Controller Service Section 7.27.
AL21 CONTROL CIRCUIT FUSE (F1/F2)

Cause: One of the 18 VAC controller fuses (F1 / F2) is open. Refer to Cd08.
Component System Sensors
Troubleshooting Check system sensors for short to ground.
Corrective Action Replace defective sensor(s).
Component Wiring
Troubleshooting Check wiring for short to ground.
Corrective Action Repair as needed.
Component Controller
Troubleshooting Controller may have an internal short.
Corrective Action Replace controller. Refer to Controller Service Section 7.27.
4–41 T-362
AL22 EVAPORATOR IP
Cause: Evaporator motor internal protector (IP) is open.
Component Evaporator Motor
Troubleshooting Shut down unit, disconnect power and check Evaporator Motor IP at
plug connection pins 4 & 6.
Corrective Action Replace defective evaporator fan motor. Refer to Evaporator Fan
Motor Service Section 7.17.
AL23 LOSS OF PHASE B

Cause: Controller fails to detect current draw.
Component Incoming Power
Troubleshooting Check incoming power source.
Corrective Action Correct power source as required.
AL24 COMPRESSOR IP
Cause: Compressor internal protector (IP) is open.
Component Compressor
Troubleshooting Shut down unit disconnect power and check resistance of compres-
sor windings at contactor T1-T2, T2-T3.
Corrective Action Monitor unit, if alarm remains active or is repetitive replace the com-
pressor at the next available opportunity. Refer to Compressor Ser-
vice Section 7.9.
AL25 CONDENSER IP
Cause: Condenser fan motor internal protector (IP) is open.
Component Insufficient Air Flow
Troubleshooting Shut down unit and check condenser fan for obstructions.
Corrective Action Remove obstructions.
Component Condenser Fan Motor
Troubleshooting Shut down unit, disconnect power and check Condenser Fan Motor
IP at plug connection pins 4 & 6.
Corrective Action Replace defective condenser fan motor. Refer to Condenser Fan
Motor Assembly Service Section 7.12.
AL26 ALL SENSORS FAILURE: SUPPLY/RETURN PROBES

Cause: Sensors out of range.
Component All sensors detected as out of range.
Troubleshooting Perform pre-trip P5.
Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.
Corrective Action If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5. Refer
to Temperature Sensor Service Section 7.28.
T-362 4–42
AL27 ANALOG TO DIGITAL ACCURACY FAILURE
Cause: Controller AD converter faulty.
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit. If the alarm persists, it indicates a defective mi-
croprocessor.
Corrective Action Replace defective microprocessor. Refer to Controller Service Sec-
tion 7.27.
AL28 LOW SUCTION PRESSURE

Cause: Suction pressure too low for normal operation.
Component N/A
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate SPT pressure readings. Refer to Manifold Gauge
Set Section 7.2.
Corrective Action Replace SPT if defective.
Set Section 7.2.
AL29 AUTOFRESH FAILURE (EAUTOFRESH)

Cause: Alarm 29 is triggered if CO2 or O2 level is outside of the limit range and the vent position is at 100%
for longer than 90 minutes.
Component Alarm LED will be activated and user intervention is required.
Troubleshooting Refer to eAutoFresh manual.
Corrective Action The alarm is triggered off when atmospheric conditions are within
limit settings.
AL29 LOSS OF ATMOSPHERIC CONTROL (XTENDFRESH)

Cause: Triggered whenever the CO2 level is above its upper limit by 1% for 60 minutes. Or, when the O2
level is greater than 1% below its setpoint for longer than 30 minutes after the unit has been in
range. The alarm is triggered off when the levels return to within the normal range.
Setup Run Cd43 test mode for troubleshooting the below components. If test
mode times out, you must restart the mode prior to the continuation of test-
ing.
Troubleshooting If components do not energize, check FX1 and FX2 for power (460 VAC).
If fuse is open, check heater continuity (XHT1 to ground). Must be greater
than 1 mega ohm. If less than 1, disconnect the heater at XHT1 and XHT2.
Replace fuse. Unit will control on fresh air solenoids.
Component Solenoid Air Vents.
4–43 T-362
AL29 LOSS OF ATMOSPHERIC CONTROL (XTENDFRESH)
Troubleshooting Visually inspect to see if the Solenoid Valves are opening air vents. If vents
open, troubleshoot the next component. If vents do not open, continue with
troubleshooting below.
Check FX4 fuse for power (~20 volts dc).
If fuse is open, check wiring and or replace solenoid if part is available.
If no part is available, open manual fresh air vent.
Component XtendFRESH Fan(s) / XtendFRESH Scrubber Motor
Troubleshooting Visually inspect to see if the XtendFRESH Fan(s) are running (air blowing
on left, intake on right), check current draw of motor at the XST1 (~40 to
200 milliamps / contactor load side). Troubleshoot the non-operating com-
ponent. If both are running, proceed to next component.
Verify XS contactor is pulling in. If not, check FX6 fuse for power (24 VAC).
If not, check power at controller KB4.
Check FX3 fuse for power (~20 vdc). If no power, replace fuse. If fuse
opens a second time, take no further action. O2 level will be controlled with
the opening and closing of the fresh air vents.
If part is available, replace either fan or scrubber motor. Fan is replaceable
from the front on a loaded unit; Scrubber motor is not. If no part is available
or accessible, take no action and service at next PTI. O2 level will be con-
trolled with the opening and closing of the fresh air vents.
Component Heater
Troubleshooting Verify XH contactor is pulling in. If not, check FX6 for power (24 VAC). If
open ohm contactors XHA1 and XSA1 to ground. Replace (12 Amp) con-
tactor. If contactor is pulling, power unit off and check heater resistance
from XH1 to XH2 (450 to 500 ohms). If heater is outside of the range, dis-
connect heater at XHT1 and XHT2 and replace at next PTI. Unit will control
on fresh air solenoids.
AL50 AIR VENT POSITION SENSOR (VPS)

Cause: VPS Sensor out of range.
Component Vent Position Sensor (VPS)
Troubleshooting Make sure VPS is secure.
Corrective Action Manually tighten panel.
Troubleshooting If the alarm persists, replace the sensor or the assembly.
Corrective Action Replace VPS.
AL51 EEPROM FAILURE

Cause: Controller Memory Failure
Troubleshooting Pressing the ENTER key when “CLEAr” is displayed will result in an
attempt to clear the alarm.
Corrective Action If action is successful (all alarms are inactive), alarm 51 will be reset.
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit. If the alarm persists, it indicates defective con-
troller memory.
Corrective Action Replace defective controller. Refer to Controller Service Section
7.27.
T-362 4–44
AL52 EEPROM ALARM LIST FULL
Cause: Alarm list queue is full
Component Active Alarms
Troubleshooting Repair any alarms in the queue that are active. Indicated by “AA”.
Corrective Action Clear alarms. Refer to Controller Alarms Section 4.5.
AL53 BATTERY PACK FAILURE

Cause: Battery voltage low
Component Battery
Troubleshooting If this alarm occurs on start up, allow a unit fitted with rechargeable
batteries to operate for up to 24 hours to charge rechargeable batter-
ies sufficiently. Once fully charged, the alarm will deactivate.
Corrective Action To clear the alarm press ENTER and ALT simultaneously at the
startup of Cd19 (Battery Check). If alarm persists, replace the battery
pack. Refer to Section 7.27.9 Battery Replacement.
AL54 PRIMARY SUPPLY SENSOR (STS)

Cause: Invalid Supply Temperature Sensor (STS) reading.
Component Supply Temperature Sensor (STS)
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5. Refer
AL56 PRIMARY RETURN SENSOR (RTS)

Cause: Invalid Return Temperature Sensor (RTS) reading.
Component Return Temperature Sensor (RTS)
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5. Refer
AL57 AMBIENT SENSOR (AMBS)

Cause: Invalid Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS) reading.
Component Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS)
Troubleshooting Test the AMBS. Refer to Sensor Checkout Procedure Section
7.28.1.
Corrective Action Replace AMBS if defective. Refer to Temperature Sensor Service
Section 7.28.
4–45 T-362
AL58 COMPRESSOR HIGH PRESSURE SAFETY (HPS)
Cause: High pressure safety switch remains open for at least one minute.
Component High Pressure Switch (HPS)
Troubleshooting Test the HPS. Refer to Checking High Pressure Switch, Section
7.10.1.
Corrective Action Replace HPS if defective. Refer to Sensor Replacement, Section
7.28.
Component Refrigeration System
Troubleshooting Check unit for air flow restrictions.
AL59 HEATER TERMINATION THERMOSTAT (HTT)

Cause: Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT) is open.
Component Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT)
Troubleshooting Check for 24 volts at test point TP10. If no voltage at TP10 after unit
has reached setpoint, HTT is open.
Corrective Action Replace HTT if defective. Refer to Sensor Replacement Section
7.28.
AL60 DEFROST TEMPERATURE SENSOR (DTS)

Cause: Failure of the Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) to open.
Component Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS)
Troubleshooting Test the DTS; refer to Sensor Checkout Procedure Section 7.28.1.
Corrective Action Replace the DTS if defective. Refer to Sensor Replacement Section
7.28.
AL61 HEATER CURRENT DRAW FAULT

Cause: Improper current draw during heat or defrost mode.
Component Heater(s)
Troubleshooting While in heat or defrost mode, check for proper current draw at heat-
er contactors. Refer to Electrical Data Section 3.3.
Corrective Action Replace heater(s) if defective. Refer to Evaporator Heater Removal
and Replacement Section 7.16.
Component Contactor
Troubleshooting Check voltage at heater contactor on the heater side.
Corrective Action If no voltage present, replace heater contactor if defective.
T-362 4–46
AL62 O2 OUT OF RANGE
Cause: This is a notification alarm and does not pose a risk to fresh produce. AL62 is triggered when there
is an indication that the O2 level is rising after reaching its setpoint (+ 1%). If O2 level exceeds 4%
above setpoint, the alarm is activated. The alarm does not activate if the unit was pre-tripped or
trip started between last reaching its O2 setpoint and exceeding the plus 4%, or if power has been
turned off for eight hours. The alarm is deactivated if O2 drops below setpoint (+ 1%) or if a pre-trip
or trip start is performed.
Component Scrubber Failure
Troubleshooting Refer to the troubleshooting of the Scrubber Motor in the AL29 alarm.
Component XtendFRESH Solenoid Valves
Troubleshooting Refer to the troubleshooting of the Solenoid Air Vent in the AL29 alarm.
Component Container Air Tightness
Troubleshooting Seal container where possible (access panels, rear doors, mounting
hardware, etc).
AL63 CURRENT LIMIT

Cause: Unit operating above current limit.
Troubleshooting Check unit for air flow restrictions.
Troubleshooting Check unit for proper operation.
Corrective Action Repair as needed.
Component Power supply
Troubleshooting Confirm supply voltage/frequency is within specification and bal-
anced according to Electrical Data Section 3.3.
Corrective Action Correct power supply.
Component Current limit set too low
Troubleshooting Check current limit setting Code Cd32.
Corrective Action The current limit can be raised (maximum of 23 amps) using Cd32.
AL64 DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE SENSOR (CPDS)

Cause: Discharge Temperature Sensor out of range.
Component Discharge Temperature Sensor (CPDS).
Troubleshooting Test the CPDS. Refer to Sensor Checkout Procedure, Section
7.28.1.
Corrective Action Replace the CPDS if defective. Refer to Sensor Replacement Sec-
tion 7.28.
4–47 T-362
AL65 DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (DPT)
Cause: Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer is out of range.
Set Section 7.2.
AL66 (SPT) SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER, (EPT) EVAPORATOR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

Cause: Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) out of range.
Troubleshooting Confirm accurate EPT and SPT pressure readings. Refer to Manifold
Gauge Set Section 7.2.
- Performing a pre-trip 5-9 test will also check the transducers.
Corrective Action Replace EPT/SPT if defective.
Troubleshooting Monitor
Corrective Action If the alarm persists, it may indicate a failing compressor. Refer to
Compressor Service Section 7.9.
AL67 HUMIDITY SENSOR

Cause: Humidity Sensor (HS) reading out of range.
Component Humidity Sensor (HS)
Troubleshooting Make sure the humidity sensor is properly connected in the socket.
Make sure the humidity sensor wires have not been damaged.
Refer to Section 7.20 to test operation of Humidity Sensor.
Corrective Action Monitor, replace HS if alarm persists.
AL69 EVAPORATOR TEMP SENSOR (ETS1)

Cause: Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1) out of range.
Component Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1)
Troubleshooting Test the ETS1. Refer to Sensor Checkout Procedure Section 7.28.1.
Corrective Action Replace Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1) if defective.
AL70 SECONDARY SUPPLY SENSOR (SRS)

Cause: Secondary Supply Sensor (SRS) is out of range.
Component Secondary Supply Sensor (SRS)
T-362 4–48
AL71 SECONDARY RETURN SENSOR (RRS)
Cause: Secondary Return Sensor (RRS) is out of range.
Component Secondary Return Sensor (RRS)
AL72 CONTROL TEMP OUT OF RANGE

Cause: After the unit goes in-range for 30 minutes then out of range for a continuous 120 minutes.
Troubleshooting Ensure unit is operating correctly.
Corrective Action Power cycle unit.
Control Temperature is in In-range.
Any pre-trip mode, resets the timers.
AL96 SCRUBBER ROTATIONAL FAILURE - OPTIONAL FEATURE

Cause: Feedback from the Scrubber Motor to the controller is not sensed when the motor is turning.
Component Scrubber Fuse
Troubleshooting Check to see if Scrubber Fuse is blown. Replace Fuse if necessary.
Component Scrubber Motor
Troubleshooting Run Test Mode and verify scrubber bed is turning. If back panel cannot
be removed to check, verify the scrubber amperage consumption, read
at XS contactor wire XSL1. If between 40 and 200mA, motor is rotating
properly. If no current detected, check and replace FX3. If current spiking
to 350mA for 2 seconds then dropping to 90mA, the scrubber motor is lo-
cated. If scrubber motor is locked, further inspection of the scrubber bed
is required. Unit will control CO2 with the fresh air solenoid when this
alarm occurs if scrubber inaccessible.
If Scrubber Motor not operating, follow the troubleshooting flowchart in
XtendFresh manual and take appropriate action.
Component Ground Interface Module (GIM)
Troubleshooting Once it has been verified that the scrubber motor is rotating check the
wiring connections to the GIM module. If all wires secured properly, re-
place the GIM module if one is available. If not, the unit will control CO2
using the fresh air solenoids.
NOTICE
If the controller is configured for four probes without a DataCORDER, the DataCORDER alarms AL70 and
AL71 will be processed as Controller alarms AL70 and AL71. Refer to Table 4–10.
4–49 T-362
ERR# INTERNAL MICROPROCESSOR FAILURE
Cause: Internal Microprocessor Failure
The controller performs self-check routines. If an internal failure occurs, an “ERR” alarm will appear
on the display. This is an indication the controller needs to be replaced.
Error Description
ERR 0-RAM failure Indicates that the controller working memory has failed.
ERR 1-Program Memory Indicates a problem with the controller program.
Failure
ERR 2-Watchdog time-out The controller program has entered a mode whereby the controller
program has stopped executing.
ERR 3-N/A N/A
ERR 4-N/A N/A
ERR 5-A-D failure The controller’s Analog to Digital (A-D) converter has failed.
ERR 6-IO Board failure Internal program/update failure.
ERR 7-Controller failure Internal version/firmware incompatible.
ERR 8-DataCORDER fail- Internal DataCORDER memory failure.
ure
ERR 9-Controller failure Internal controller memory failure.
In the event that a failure occurs and the display cannot be updated, the status LED will indicate
the appropriate ERR code using Morse code as shown below.
E R R 0 to 9
ERR0 = . .-. .-. -----
ERR1 = . .-. .-. . ----
ERR2 = . .-. .-. . . ---
ERR3 = . .-. .-. . . . --
ERR4 = . .-. .-. . . . . -
ERR5 = . .-. .-. . . . . .
ERR6 = . .-. .-. -. . . .
ERR7 = . .-. .-. --. . .
ERR8 = . .-. .-. ---. .
ERR9 = . .-. .-. ---- .
ENTR ENTER SET POINT (PRESS ARROW & ENTER)

STPT
Cause: The controller is prompting the operator to enter a setpoint.
LO LOW MAIN VOLTAGE (FUNCTION CODES CD27-38 DISABLED AND NO ALARM STORED.)
Cause: This message will be alternately displayed with the setpoint whenever the supply voltage is less
than 75% of its proper value.
T-362 4–50
4.11 CONTROLLER PRE-TRIP TEST CODES
Table 4–7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes
NOTE
“Auto” or “Auto1” menu includes the: P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6 and rSLts. “Auto2” menu includes P0, P1, P2,
P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9, P10 and rSLts. “Auto3” menu includes P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7 and P8.
P0-0 Pre-Trip Initiated: Container identifier code, Cd18 Software Revision Number, Cd20 Con-
Configuration Display, Indi- tainer Unit Model Number, & configuration database identifier CFM-
cator Lamps, LEDs, and MYYDD are displayed in sequence.
Displays Next the unit will indicate the presence or non-presence of an RMU ac-
cording to whether any RMU inquiry messages have been received
since the unit was booted.
Units equipped with Autoslide Enabled (Cnf44) will cause the vent to
seek to its closed position, followed by two sequences of opening to
100% and returning to the closed position. No other autoslide mode of
operation will be available until the two cycles of opening and closing
have completed.
Since the system cannot recognize lights and display failures, there are
no test codes or results associated with this phase of pre-trip. To know
if the test passes the operator must observe that the LCD display ele-
ments and the indicator lights behave as described below.
P1 Tests - Heaters Current Draw: Heater is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within specified
range. No other system components will change state during this test.
P1-0 Heaters Turned On Heater starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and then the
heater is turned on. After 15 seconds, the current draw is measured
again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if the change in current draw test is in the range specified.
P1-1 Heaters Turned Off Heater starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and then the
heater is turned on. After 15 seconds, the current draw is measured
again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if the change in current draw test is in the range specified.
P2 Tests - Condenser Fan Current Draw: Condenser fan is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall
within specified range. No other system components will change state during this test. If the Water Pres-
sure Switch is open this test will be skipped.
P2-0 Condenser Fan On Condenser fan starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and
condenser fan is then turned on. After 15 seconds the current draw is
measured again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P2-1 Condenser Fan Off Condenser fan is then turned off. After 10 seconds the current draw is
measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
P3 Tests - Low Speed Evaporator Fan Current Draw: The system must be equipped with a low speed
evaporator fan, as determined by CnF02, the Evaporator Fan Speed Select configuration variable. Low
speed evaporator fan is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within specified range. No other sys-
tem components will change state during this test.
NOTE
If unit configured for single evaporator fan operation and either AL11 or AL12 is active at the start of
either test, then the test will fail immediately. If AL11 or AL12 become active during the test, then the
test will fail upon conclusion of the test.
P3-0 Low Speed Evaporator Fan High speed evaporator fans will be turned on for 20 seconds, the fans
Motors On will be turned off for 4 seconds, current draw is measured, and then the
low speed evaporator fans are turned on. After 60 seconds the current
draw is measured again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
4–51 T-362
Table 4–7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes (Continued)
P3-1 Low Speed Evaporator Fan Low speed evaporator fans are then turned off. After 10 seconds the
Motors Off current draw is measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
P4 Tests - High Speed Evaporator Fans Current Draw: High speed evaporator fans are turned on,
then off. Current draw must fall within specified range and measured current changes must exceed spec-
ified ratios. No other system components will change state during this test.
NOTE
If unit configured for single evaporator fan operation and either AL11 or AL12 is active at the start of
either test, then the test will fail immediately. If AL11 or AL12 become active during the test, then the
test will fail upon conclusion of the test.
P4-0 High Speed Evaporator Evaporator fans start in the off condition, current draw is measured,
Fan Motors On then high speed evaporator fans will be turned on. After 60 seconds the
current draw is measured again. The change in current draw is then re-
corded.
Test passes if change in current draw in the specified range AND mea-
sured current changes exceed specified ratios.
If the three phase motors are configured IN, the change ratio test is
skipped.
P4-1 High Speed Evaporator High speed evaporator fans are then turned off. After 10 seconds the
Fan Motors Off current draw is measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
P5 Tests - Air Stream Temperature Sensor Tests: Tests the validity of the Air Stream Temperature
Sensors.
P5-0 Supply/Return Probe Test The High Speed Evaporator Fan is turned on and run for eight minutes,
with all other outputs de-energized. A temperature comparison is made
between the return and supply probes.
Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.
NOTE
If this test fails, “P5-0” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both
Probe tests (this test and the PRIMARY/SECONDARY) pass,
display will read “P5” “PASS.”
P5-1 Supply Probe Test This test if for units equipped with secondary supply probe only.
The temperature difference between primary supply probe and second-
ary supply probe is compared.
NOTE
If this test fails, “P5-1” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both
Probe tests (this and the SUPPLY/RETURN TEST) pass,
because of the multiple tests, the display will read “P5”
“PASS.”
P5-2 Return Probe Test For units equipped with secondary return probe only.
The temperature difference between return temperature sensor (RTS)
and return temperature sensor (RRS) probe is compared.
NOTES
1. If this test fails, “P5-2” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both
Probe tests (this test and the SUPPLY/RETURN) pass,
because of the multiple tests, the display will read “P 5,”
“PASS.”
2. The results of pre-trip tests 5-0, 5-1 and 5-2 will be used to
activate or clear control probe alarms.
T-362 4–52
P5-3 Evaporator Fan Direction With evaporator fan running on high speed, measure the temperature
Test difference between the primary supply and primary return probes. Turn
the heaters on for 60 seconds then measure the temperature difference
between the primary supply and primary return probes for up to 120 ad-
ditional seconds.
This is a Pass/Fail test. The test passes if differential of STS is 0.25°C
higher than RTS.
Test P5-0 must pass before this test is run.
P5-7 Primary vs. Secondary This is a Pass/Fail test of the primary evaporator temperature sensor
Evaporator Temperature (ETS1) and secondary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS2).
Sensor Test Test passes if secondary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS2) is
within +/- 0.5°C of the primary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS1).
P5-8 Primary Evaporator Pres- This is a Pass/Fail test of the Primary Evaporator Pressure Transducer.
sure Transducer Test Test passes if suction pressure transducer (SPT) is within +/- 0 psi of
saturation pressure at current evaporator temperature. Also passes if
SPT is within +/- 1 psi of discharge pressure 6 hours after a power inter-
ruption.
P5-9 Suction (Evaporator) Pres- Units equipped with a secondary Evaporator pressure transducer.
sure Transducer Test Test passes if suction pressure transducer (SPT) is within +/- 1.5 psi of
the evaporator pressure transducer (EPT).
P5-10 Humidity Sensor Controller This is a Pass/Fail/Skip test of the humidity sensor configuration.
Configuration Verification Test passes if the controller configuration has humidity sensor in.
Test Test fails if the controller configuration has humidity sensor out and Vout
is greater than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Test is skipped if the controller configuration has the humidity sensor
out and Vout is less than 0.20 Volts.
P5-11 Humidity Sensor Installa- This is a Pass/Fail test of humidity sensor installation (sensor is pres-
tion Verification Test ent).
Test passes if Vout is greater than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Test fails if Vout is less than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
P5-12 Humidity Sensor Range This is a Pass/Fail test of the Humidity Sensor Range.
Check Test Test passes if Vout for the humidity sensor is between 0.33 Volts and 4
Volts.
Test fails if Vout is outside of this range.
P6 Tests - Refrigerant Probes, Compressor and Refrigerant Valves: Pass/Fail testing is performed
for the compressor, EEV, DUV, LIV (if equipped), ESV, and the refrigerant pressure and temperature sen-
sors.
P6-0 Discharge Thermistor Test If Alarm 64 is active the test fails. Otherwise, the test passes.
P6-1 Suction Thermistor Test If the Suction Temperature Sensor (CPSS) both is configured ON and
is invalid, the test fails. Otherwise the test passes.
P6-2 Discharge Pressure Trans- If Alarm 65 is active any time during the first 45 second period, the test
ducer Test fails. Otherwise, the test passes.
P6-3 Suction Pressure Trans- If Alarm 66 is active the test fails. Otherwise the test passes.
ducer Test
P6-4 Compressor Current Draw Compressor current is tested before and 10 seconds after start up. If
Test current does not increase, the test fails. P6-7 is run at the end of P6-4.
If this test fails, P6-6 is skipped.
4–53 T-362
P6-5 Compressor Leak Test Pre-trip P6-5 ensures that the compressor holds pressure. After com-
pressor pump up and pump down, the compressor is turned off for 62
seconds. When suction side pressure holds (less than 8 psi rise) for 10
seconds, P6-5 passes, otherwise the Compressor Leak Test fails.
Refer to the July 2017 issue of TechLine for a procedure to assist the
technician in troubleshooting a P6-5 occurrence.
NOTE
P6-6 through P6-10 are conducted by changing status of each valve and comparing suction pressure
change and/or compressor current change with predetermined values. Tests will cause compressor and
condenser fans to cycle on and off as needed to generate the pressure required for individual pre-trip
sub tests. The compressor will start in order to build discharge pressure, followed by compressor pump
down sequence. At the conclusion of compressor pump down sequence, the compressor will shut down
and the valve test will start.
P6-6 Economizer Valve Test Passes if suction pressure increases a minimum of 4 psia when the
valve opens for 15 seconds.
P6-7 Digital Unloader Valve Test Passes if pressure and current changes are within 3 seconds of DUV
switch signal and either the pressure change or the current draw
change is above 5 psi or above 1.5A, respectively.
P6-9 Liquid Injection Valve Test (If equipped) Test passes if change of suction pressure is greater than
4 psia when the valve opens for 10 seconds. Otherwise, it fails.
P6-10 Electronic Expansion Valve The test records the suction pressure during the open valve position
Test and passes if the suction pressure increase is above 3 psi when the
valve opens for 10 seconds.
NOTE
P7-0 & P8 are included with “Auto 2 & Auto 3” only. P9-0 through P10 are included with “Auto2” only.
P7 Tests - High Pressure Tests: Unit is run at full capacity without condenser fan running to make sure
that the HPS opens and closes properly.
P7-0 High Pressure Switch Test is skipped if sensed ambient temperature is less than 7.2°C (45°F),
(HPS) Opening Test return air temperature is less than -17.8°C (0°F), or the water pressure
switch is open.
With the unit running, the condenser fan is turned off and a 900 second
(15 minute) timer is started. The right display shows Discharge Pres-
sure if the sensor is configured and valid, else Discharge Temperature.
The unit needs to disable Discharge Pressure limit and enable Current
Limit checks.
The test fails immediately if:
-Ambient Temperature Sensor invalid
-Composite Return Temperature Sensor invalid
-HPS is open
The test fails if:
-HPS fails to open before 900 seconds total test time.
-Evaporator or Compressor IP Alarm.
-Calculated Dome Temperature exceeds 137.78°C (280°F).
-Discharge pressure exceeds 370 psig.
-Compressor Current exceeds limits
The test passes if HPS opens within the 15 minute time limit.
P7-1 High Pressure Switch If return temperature greater than -2.4°C, set setpoint to -5.0°C, else set
(HPS) Closing Test setpoint to -30°C. Restart unit according to normal startup logic. Run
unit normally for 120 seconds.
The test passes if the high pressure switch closes within 75 seconds af-
ter end of Test 7-0, else the test fails.
Test P7-0 must pass for this test to execute.
T-362 4–54
P8 Tests - Perishable Mode Tests: Pre-trip tests P7-0 and P7-1 must have passed or have been
skipped for these tests to execute.
P8-0 Perishable Mode Test If the control temperature is below 15.6°C, the setpoint is changed to
15.6°C, and a 180 Minute timer is started. The control will then be
placed in the equivalent of normal heating. If the control temperature is
above 15.6°C. at the start of the test, then the test proceeds immediate-
ly to test 8-1. While in test 8-0 the right display will show the value of the
control temperature.
The test fails if the 180 Minute timer expires before the control tempera-
ture reaches setpoint - 0.3°C. If the test fails, it will not auto-repeat.
There is no pass display for this test. Once the control temperature
reaches setpoint, the test proceeds to test 8-1.
P8-1 Perishable Mode Pull Control temperature must be at least 15.6°C (60°F).
Down Test / eAutoFresh The setpoint is changed to 0°C (32°F), and a 180-minute timer is start-
CO2 Sensor Calibration ed. The left display will read “P8-1,” the right display will show the supply
air temperature. The unit will then start to pull down the temperature to
the 0°C setpoint.
The test passes if the container temperature reaches setpoint before
the 180-minute timer expires.
On units where the CO2 Sensor Status indicates that a CO2 sensor is
present, calibration of the CO2 sensor will be attempted during P8-1.
Once P8-1 begins, calibration will be attempted when the supply tem-
perature goes below 5°C. If the CO2 sensor voltage reads within the
0.95 <>1.15Vdc range before the end of P8-1, the sensor will be cali-
brated by holding the CO2 zero line low for 4 seconds. Once calibration
is performed, the sensor voltage will be verified to make sure it is in the
0.95 to 1.05 Vdc range. If the voltage is not within this range, CO2 sen-
sor calibration fails.
P8-2 Perishable Mode Maintain Test P8-1 must pass for P8-2 to execute.
Temperature Test A fifteen minute timer is started, and the system will attempt to minimize
control temperature error (supply temperature minus setpoint) until the
timer expires. The control temperature will be sampled each minute
starting at the beginning of P8-2.
During P8-2, the left display will read “P8-2,” and the right display will
show the supply air temperature.
When the test is completed, the average control temperature error will
be compared to the pass/fail criteria.
Test passes if the average temperature error is within +/- 1.0°C.
Test fails if the average temperature error is greater than +/- 1.0°C, or if
the DataCORDER supply temperature probe is invalid. If the test fails,
the control probe temperature will be recorded as -50.0°C.
P9 Test - DTT Close and Open Test: The DTT in this control is not a physical device, with actual metal-
lic contacts, it is a software function that acts similar to a thermostat. Using various temperature inputs,
the DTT function determines whether a thermostat mounted on the Evaporator Coil would have OPEN or
CLOSED contacts. Primarily, the DTT function operates based on the temperature reading from the
Defrost Termination Sensor.
4–55 T-362
P9-0 DTT Closed and Open Test During P9-0 the defrost temperature sensor (DTS) reading will be dis-
played on the left display. The right display will show the supply air tem-
perature.
The unit will run FULL COOL for 30 minutes maximum until the DTT is
considered closed. This step may not have to be executed. Once the
DTT is considered closed, the unit simulates defrost by running the
heaters for up to two hours, or until the DTT is considered open.
Test fails if:
The DTT is not considered closed after the 30 minutes of full
cooling.
HTT opens when DTT is considered closed or if return air tem-
perature rises above 48°C (120°F).
Test passes if the DTT is considered open within the 2 hour heat cycle
time limit.
P10 Tests - Frozen Mode Tests:
P10-0 Frozen Mode Heat Test If the container temperature is below 7.2°C, the setpoint is changed to
7.2°C, and a 180 Minute timer is started. The control will then be placed
in the equivalent of normal heating. If the container temperature is
above 7.2°C. at the start of the test, then the test proceeds immediately
to test 10-1. During this test, the control temperature will be shown on
the right display.
The test fails if the 180 Minute timer expires before the control tempera-
ture reaches setpoint - 0.3°C. If the test fails, it will not auto-repeat.
There is no pass display for this test. Once the control temperature
reaches setpoint, the test proceeds to test 10-1.
P10-1 Frozen Mode Pulldown Control temperature must be at least 7.2°C (45°F)
Test The setpoint is changed to -17.8°C. The system will then attempt to pull
down the control temperature to setpoint using normal frozen mode
cooling. During this test, the control temperature will be shown on the
right display.
The test passes if the control temperature reaches setpoint minus 0.3°C
before the 180 minute timer expires. Otherwise, the test fails. Upon fail-
ure and when initiated by an automatic pre-trip sequence, P10-1 will
auto-repeat once by starting P10-0 over again.
P10-2 Frozen Mode Maintain Test P10-1 must pass for this test to execute.
Temperature Test Same as for test 8-2 except the control temperature is the return probe
temperature.
The average error must be +/-1.6°C. If the DataCORDER supply tem-
perature probe is invalid, the test fails and the control probe temperature
will be recorded as -50°C. Upon failure and when initiated by an auto-
matic pre-trip sequence, P10-2 will auto-repeat by starting P10-0 over
again.
T-362 4–56
Table 4–8 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments
NOTE
Inapplicable Functions Display “-----”
To Access: Press ALT. MODE key then CODE SELECT key
dC1 Recorder Supply Temperature Current reading of the supply recorder sensor.
dC2 Recorder Return Temperature Current reading of the return recorder sensor.
dC3-5 USDA 1,2,3 Temperatures Current readings of the three USDA probes.
dC6-13 Network Data Points 1-8 Current values of the network data points (as configured). Data point
1 (Code 6) is generally the humidity sensor and its value is obtained
from the controller once every minute.
dC14 Cargo Probe 4 Temperature Current reading of the cargo probe #4.
dC15-19 Future Expansion These codes are for future expansion, and are not in use at this time.
dC20-24 Temperature Sensors 1-5 Current calibration offset values for each of the five probes: supply,
Calibration return, USDA #1, #2, and #3. These values are entered via the in-
terrogation program.
dC25 Future Expansion This code is for future expansion, and is not in use at this time.
dC26,27 S/N, Left 4, Right 4 The DataCORDER serial number consists of eight characters.
Function code dC26 contains the first four characters. Function
code dC27 contains the last four characters. (This serial number is
the same as the controller serial number.)
dC28 Minimum Days Left An approximation of the number of logging days remaining until the
DataCORDER starts to overwrite the existing data.
dC29 Days Stored Number of days of data that are currently stored in the DataCORD-
ER.
dC30 Date of Last Trip start The date when a Trip Start was initiated by the user. In addition, if
the system goes without power for seven continuous days or longer,
a trip start will automatically be generated on the next AC power up.
Press and hold “ENTER” key for five seconds to initiate a “Trip
Start.”
dC31 Battery Test Results Shows the current status of the optional battery pack.
PASS: Battery pack is fully charged. FAIL: Battery pack voltage is
low.
dC32 Time: Hour, Minute Current time on the real time clock (RTC) in the DataCORDER.
dC33 Date: Month, Day Current date (month and day) on the RTC in the DataCORDER.
dC34 Date: Year Current year on the RTC in the DataCORDER.
dC35 Cargo Probe 4 Calibration Current calibration value for the Cargo Probe. This value is an input
via the interrogation program.
4–57 T-362
Table 4–9 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Result Records
TEST TITLE DATA
1-0 Heater On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in current for Phase A, B and C
1-1 Heater Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
2-0 Condenser Fan On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Water pressure switch (WPS) - Open/Closed,
Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
2-1 Condenser Fan Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
3-0 Low Speed Evaporator Fan On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
3-1 Low Speed Evaporator Fan Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
4-0 High Speed Evaporator Fan On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
4-1 High Speed Evaporator Fan Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
5-0 Supply/Return Probe Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, RTS, SRS and RRS
5-1 Secondary Supply Probe (SRS) Pass/Fail/Skip
Test
5-2 Secondary Return Probe (RRS) Pass/Fail/Skip
Test
6-0 Discharge Thermistor Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-1 Suction Thermistor Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-2 Discharge Pressure Transducer Pass/Fail/Skip
Test
6-3 Suction Pressure Transducer Pass/Fail/Skip
Test
6-4 Compressor Current Draw Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-5 Compressor Leak Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-6 Economizer Valve Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-7 Digital Unloader Valve Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6-9 Liquid Injection Valve Test (If Pass/Fail/Skip
equipped)
6-10 Electronic Expansion Valve Test Pass/Fail/Skip
7-0 High Pressure Switch Closed Pass/Fail/Skip Result, AMBS, DPT or CPT (if equipped)
Input values that component opens
7-1 High Pressure Switch Open Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, DPT or CPT (if equipped)
Input values that component closes
8-0 Perishable Mode Heat Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time it takes to heat to 16°C (60°F)
8-1 Perishable Mode Pulldown Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time it takes to pull down to 0°C (32°F)
8-2 Perishable Mode Maintain Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER supply temperature
(SRS) over last recording interval.
9-0 Defrost Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, DTS reading at end of test, line voltage, line
frequency, time in defrost.
10-0 Frozen Mode Heat Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time unit is in heat.
10-1 Frozen Mode Pulldown Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time to pull down unit to -17.8°C (0°F).
10-2 Frozen Mode Maintain Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER return temperature
(RRS) over last recording interval.
T-362 4–58
Table 4–10 DataCORDER Alarm Indications
To Access: Press ALT. MODE key then ALARM LIST key
dAL70 Recorder Supply Temperature The supply recorder sensor reading is outside of the range of -50°C
Out of Range to 70°C (-58°F to +158°F), or the probe check logic has determined
there is a fault with this sensor.
NOTE
The P5 pre-trip test must be run to inactivate the alarm.
dAL71 Recorder Return Temperature The return recorder sensor reading is outside of the range of -50°C
Out of Range to 70°C (-58°F to +158°F), or the probe check logic has determined
there is a fault with this sensor.
NOTE
The P5 pre-trip test must be run to inactivate the alarm.
dAL72-74 USDA Temperatures 1, 2, 3 The USDA probe temperature reading is outside of -50°C to 70°C (-
Out of Range 58°F to +158°F) range.
dAL75 Cargo Probe 4 Out of Range The cargo probe temperature reading is outside of -50°C to 70°C (-
58°F to +158°F) range.
dAL76, 77 Future Expansion These alarms are for future expansion and are not in use at this time.
dAL78-85 Network Data Point 1 - 8 Out of The network data point is outside of its specified range. The Data-
Range CORDER is configured by default to record the supply and return re-
corder sensors. The DataCORDER may be configured to record up
to eight additional network data points. An alarm number (AL78 to
AL85) is assigned to each configured point. When an alarm occurs,
the DataCORDER must be interrogated to identify the data point as-
signed. When a humidity sensor is installed, it is usually assigned to
AL78.
dAL86 RTC Battery Low The real time clock (RTC) backup battery is too low to adequately
maintain the RTC reading.
A real time clock failure is critical to the operation of the unit. If this
alarm occurs, replace the RTC battery at the next available opportu-
nity. After replacing the battery the following actions are required:
- Update the RTC setting
- Update the unit’s software configuration
- Update the operational software
- Update all user selectable function code settings (defrost,
setpoint, etc)
dAL87 RTC Failure An invalid time has been detected. Either the DataCORDER run time
hour and minute have not changed at the start of the hour, or the real
time clock (RTC) time has gained or lost more than 2 minutes in the
hour. This situation may be corrected by cycling the power, setting
the clock or meeting the above criteria for an hour.
dAL88 DataCORDER EEPROM Fail- A write of critical DataCORDER information to the EEPROM has
ure failed.
dAL89 Flash Memory Error An error has been detected in the process of writing daily data to the
non-volatile FLASH memory.
dAL90 Future Expansion This alarm is for future expansion, and is not in use at this time.
dAL91 Alarm List Full The DataCORDER alarm queue is determined to be full (eight
alarms).
4–59 T-362
SECTION 5
OPERATION
5.1 INSPECTION
! WARNING
Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and condenser fans. The unit may cycle the
fans and compress or unexpectedly as control requirements dictate.
1. Check inside the unit for the following conditions:

• Check channels or “T” bar floor for cleanliness. Channels must be free of debris for proper air circulation.
• Check container panels, insulation and door seals for damage. Perform permanent or temporary repairs.
• Check visually that the evaporator fan motor mounting bolts are properly secured (refer to Section 7.17).
• Check for visible corrosion on the evaporator stator and fan deck (refer to Section 7.18).
• Check for dirt or grease on evaporator fans or fan deck and clean if necessary (refer to Section 7.18).
• Check evaporator coil for cleanliness or obstructions. Wash with fresh water (refer to Section 7.18).
• Check defrost drain pans and drain lines for obstructions and clear if necessary. Wash with fresh water.
• Check panels on refrigeration unit for loose bolts and condition of panels. Make sure T.I.R. devices are in
place on access panels.
2. Check condenser coil for cleanliness. Wash with fresh water (refer to Section 7.11).
3. Open the control box door. Check for loose electrical connections or hardware.
4. Check color of moisture-liquid indicator.
5.2 CONNECT POWER
! WARNING
Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) before turning OFF the Start-Stop switch (ST), unit cir-
cuit breaker(s) and external power source.
! WARNING
Make sure the power plugs are clean and dry before connecting to power receptacle.
5.2.1 Connecting to 380/460 VAC Power

1. Make sure the Start-Stop switch (ST), located on the control panel, is in “0” position (Off).
2. Make sure circuit breaker CB-1, located in the control box, is in “0” position (Off).
3. Plug the 460 VAC (yellow) cable into a de-energized 380/460 VAC, 3-phase power source and energize the
power source.
4. Place circuit breaker CB-1 in “I” position (On).
5. Close and secure the control box door.
5.2.2 Connecting to 190/230 VAC Power
To allow unit operation on nominal 230 volt power, an autotransformer (see Figure 5.1) is required. The autotrans-
former is fitted with a 230 VAC cable and a receptacle to accept the standard 460 VAC power plug. The 230 volt
cable is black in color while the 460 volt cable is yellow. The transformer may also be equipped with a circuit
breaker (CB-2). The transformer is a step-up transformer that provides 380/460 VAC, 3-phase, 50/60 Hz power to
the unit when the 230 VAC power cable is connected to a 190/230 VAC, 3-phase power source.
5–1 T-362
PROCEDURE:
1. Make sure the Start-Stop switch (ST), located on the control panel, is in “0” position (Off).
2. Make sure circuit breaker CB-1, located in the control box, and CB-2, located on the transformer, are both in
“0” position (Off).
3. Plug in and lock the 460 VAC power plug at the receptacle on the transformer.
4. Plug the 230 VAC (black) cable into a de-energized 190/230 VAC, 3-phase power source and energize the
power source.
5. Set circuit breakers CB-1 and CB-2 to “I” position (On).
6. Close and secure the control box door.
Figure 5.1 Autotransformer
460 VAC Power

Circuit Breaker (CB-2) Receptacle
230-Volt
Dual Voltage Modular

Autotransformer
5.3 ADJUST FRESH AIR MAKEUP VENT

The purpose of the fresh air makeup vent is to provide ventilation for commodities that require fresh air circulation.
The vent must be closed when transporting frozen foods.
Air exchange depends on static pressure differential, which will vary depending on the container and how the con-
tainer is loaded.
Units may be equipped with a vent position sensor (VPS). The VPS determines the position of the fresh air vent
(upper or lower, as equipped) and sends data to the controller display.
5.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent

Two slots and a stop are designed into the Upper Fresh Air disc for air flow adjustments. The first slot allows for a 0
to 30% air flow; the second slot allows for a 30 to 100% air flow.
To adjust the percentage of air flow, loosen the wing nut and rotate the disc until the desired percentage of air flow
matches with the arrow. Tighten the wing nut.
To clear the gap between the slots, loosen the wing nut until the disc clears the stop.
See Figure 5.2 for air exchange values for an empty container. Higher values can be expected for a fully loaded
container.
T-362 5–2
Figure 5.2 Upper Fresh Air Make Up Flow Chart
AIR AIR
FLOW FLOW
(CMH) (CMH) 60HZ
50HZ
250 300
TBAR TBAR
250 1 1/2”
200 1 1/2”
TBAR
TBAR 200 2 5/8”
2 5/8”
150 TBAR 3”
TBAR 3”
150
100
100
50 50
0
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PERCENT OPEN
PERCENT OPEN
5.3.2 Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent

a. Full Open or Closed Positions
Maximum air flow is achieved by loosening the wing nuts and moving the cover to the maximum open (100%) posi-
tion. The closed position is 0% air flow position. The operator may also adjust the opening to increase or decrease
the air flow volume to meet the required air flow.
b. Reduced Flow for Lower Fresh Air Makeup
NOTE
In order to prevent inaccurate display readings on units equipped with a VPS, ensure that the rack and
pinion drive of the VPS is not disrupted when adjusting the air makeup vent.
NOTE
Do not loosen the hex nut beyond its stop. Doing so may cause inaccurate display readings and errors
in DataCORDER reports.
Similar to the Upper Fresh Air Makeup vent, two slots and a stop are designed into the Lower Fresh Air slide for air
flow adjustments. The first slot allows for a 0 to 25% air flow; the second slot allows for a 25 to 100% air flow. To
adjust the percentage of air flow, loosen the hex nut and rotate the disc until the desired percentage of air flow
matches with the arrow. Tighten the hex nut. To clear the gap between the slots, loosen the hex nut until the disc
clears the stop.
On some models the air slide is supplied with two adjustable air control discs. The fresh air makeup can be
adjusted for 15, 35, 50 or 75 cubic meters per hour (CMH). The air flow has been established at 60 Hz power and
2-1/2 inch T bar and with 15 mm (0.6 inch) H2O external static above free blow.
Loosen the hex nut, adjust each disc to the required air flow, then tighten the hex nut.
NOTE
The main air slide is in the fully closed position during reduced air flow operation when equipped with
air control discs.
c. Air Sampling for Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Level

Loosen the hex nuts and move the cover until the arrow on the cover is aligned with the “atmosphere sampling
port” label. Tighten the hex nuts and attach a 3/8 in. hose to the sampling port.
If the internal atmosphere content has reached an unacceptable level, the operator may adjust the disc opening to
meet the required air flow volume to ventilate the container.
5–3 T-362
5.3.3 Vent Position Sensor
The vent position sensor (VPS) allows the user to determine the position of the fresh air vent via Cd45. This func-
tion code is accessible via the Code Select key.
The vent position will display for 30 seconds whenever motion corresponding to 5 CMH (3 CFM) or greater is
detected. It will scroll in intervals of 5 CMH (3 CFM). Scrolling to Cd45 will display the Fresh Air Vent Position.
The position of the vent will be recorded in the DataCORDER whenever the unit is running under AC power and
during any of the following conditions:
• Trip start
• Every power cycle
• Midnight
• Manual changes greater than 5 CMH (3 CFM) remaining in the new position for at least four minutes
NOTE
The user has four minutes to make necessary adjustments to the vent setting. This time calculation
begins on the initial movement of the sensor. The vent can be moved to any position within the four
minutes. On completion of the first four minutes, the vent is required to remain stable for the next four
minutes. If vent position changes are detected during the four-minute stability period, AL50 will be
generated. This provides the user with the ability to change the vent setting without generating multi-
ple events in the DataCORDER.
5.4 EAUTOFRESH OPERATION

The optional eAutoFresh™ venting system is controlled through two function codes, Code 43 and Code 44. Code
43 contains specific parameters for operation and Code 44 provides a visible display of component conditions.
5.5 XTENDFRESH OPERATION

The optional XtendFRESH™ controlled atmosphere system is controlled through two function codes, Code 43 and
Code 44. Code 43 contains specific parameters for operation and Code 44 provides a visible display of component
conditions.
5.6 CONNECT WATER-COOLED CONDENSER

The water-cooled condenser is used when cooling water is available and heating the surrounding air is objection-
able, such as in a ship’s hold. If water-cooled operation is desired, connect in accordance with the following sub-
paragraphs.
5.6.1 Water-Cooled Condenser with Water Pressure Switch

1. Connect the water supply line to the inlet side of the condenser and the discharge line to the outlet side of
the condenser (see Figure 3.6, Figure 3.7).
2. Maintain a flow rate of 11 to 26 liters per minute (3 to 7 gallons per minute). The water pressure switch will
open to de-energize the condenser fan relay. The condenser fan motor will stop and will remain stopped
until the water pressure switch closes.
3. To shift to air-cooled condenser operation, disconnect the water supply and the discharge line to the water-
cooled condenser. The refrigeration unit will shift to air-cooled condenser operation when the water pressure
switch closes.
5.6.2 Water-Cooled Condenser with Condenser Fan Switch

1. Connect the water supply line to the inlet side of condenser and the discharge line to the outlet side of the
condenser (see Figure 3.6, Figure 3.7).
T-362 5–4
2. Maintain a flow rate of 11 to 26 lpm (3 to 7 gpm).
3. Set the condenser fan switch to position “O.” This will de-energize the condenser fan relay. The condenser
fan motor will stop and remain stopped until the CFS switch is set to position “I.”
! CAUTION
When condenser water flow is below 11 lpm (3 gpm) or when water-cooled operation is not in
use, the CFS switch MUST be set to position “1” or the unit will not operate properly.
4. To shift to air-cooled condenser operation, stop the unit, set the CFS switch to position “I” and restart the
unit. Disconnect the water lines to the water-cooled condenser
5.7 CONNECT REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE

If remote monitoring is required, connect the remote monitor plug at the unit receptacle (see Figure 3.8).
When the remote monitor plug is connected to the remote monitoring receptacle, the following remote circuits are
energized:
CIRCUIT FUNCTION
Sockets B to A Energizes remote cool light
Sockets C to A Energizes remote defrost light
Sockets D to A Energizes remote in-range light
5.8 STARTING AND STOPPING INSTRUCTIONS
! WARNING
Make sure that the unit circuit breaker(s) CB-1 & CB-2 and the Start-Stop switch (ST) are in the
“O” (OFF) position before connecting to any electrical power source.
NOTE
The electronic phase detection system will check for proper compressor rotation within the first 30 sec-
onds. If rotation is not correct, the compressor will be stopped and restarted in the opposite direction.
If the compressor is producing unusually loud and continuous noise after the first 30 seconds of oper-
ation, stop the unit and investigate.
5.8.1 Starting the Unit

1. Verify that power is properly applied, the fresh air vent is in proper position, and (if required) the water-
cooled condenser is connected.
2. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to position “I” (ON) (see Figure 3.8). The controller function codes for the
container ID (Cd40), software version (Cd18) and unit model number (Cd20) will be displayed in sequence.
3. Continue with the Start Up Inspection. Refer to Section 5.9.
5.8.2 Stopping the Unit

1. To stop the unit, place the Start-Stop switch (ST) in position “0” (OFF).
5.9 START-UP INSPECTION
5.9.1 Physical Inspection

Check rotation of condenser and evaporator fans.
5.9.2 Check Controller Function Codes

Check, and if required, reset controller Function Codes (Cd27 through Cd39) in accordance with desired operating
parameters. Refer to Table 4–6.
5–5 T-362
5.9.3 Start Temperature Recorder
DataCORDER
1. Check and, if required, set the DataCORDER Configuration in accordance with desired recording parame-
ter. Refer to Section 4.7.3.
2. Enter a “Trip Start” with the following instructions:
a. Press the ALT MODE key. When the left display shows “dC”, press the ENTER key.
b. Scroll to Code dC30.
c. Press and hold the ENTER key for five seconds.
d. The “Trip Start” event will be entered in the DataCORDER.
5.9.4 Complete Inspection

Allow the unit to run for five minutes to stabilize conditions, and then perform a pre-trip diagnosis in accordance
with Section 5.10.
5.10 PRE-TRIP DIAGNOSIS
! CAUTION
! CAUTION
When PRE-TRIP key is pressed, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode will be deactivated.
At the completion of pre-trip activity, economy, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reac-
tivated.
Pre-trip diagnosis provides automatic testing of the unit components using internal measurements and comparison
logic. The program will provide a “PASS” or “FAIL” display to indicate test results.
The testing begins with access to a pre-trip selection menu. The user may have the option of selecting one of two
automatic tests.
These tests will automatically perform a series of individual pre-trip tests. The user may also scroll down to select
any of the individual tests.
When only the short sequence is configured, it will appear as “AUtO” in the display. Otherwise “AUtO1” will indicate
the short sequence and “AUtO2” will indicate the long sequence. The test short sequence will run tests P0 through
P6. The long test sequence will run tests P0 through P10.
A detailed description of the pre-trip test codes is listed in Table 4–7. If no selection is made, the pre-trip menu
selection process will terminate automatically. However, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated man-
ually if required.
Scrolling down to the “rSLts” code and pressing ENTER will allow the user to scroll through the results of the last
pre-trip testing run. If no Pre-testing has been run (or an individual test has not been run) since the unit was pow-
ered up, “- - - -” will be displayed.
To start a pre-trip test, do the following:
NOTE
Prior to starting a pre-trip test, verify that unit voltage (Cd07) is within tolerance and unit amperage
draw (Cd04, Cd05, Cd06) are within expected limits. Otherwise, tests may fail incorrectly.
All alarms must be rectified and cleared before starting tests.
Pre-trip may also be initiated via communications. The operation is the same as for the keypad initia-
tion described below except that should a test fail, the pre-trip mode will automatically terminate.
T-362 5–6
When initiated via communications, a pre-trip test may not be interrupted with an arrow key, but the
pre-trip test can be terminated with the PRE-TRIP key.
1. Press the PRE-TRIP key to access the pre-trip test selection menu.
2. TO RUN AN AUTOMATIC TEST: Scroll through the selections by pressing the UP ARROW or DOWN
ARROW keys to display AUTO, AUTO 1, AUTO 2 or AUTO 3 as desired, then press ENTER.
a. The unit will execute the series of tests without any need for direct user interface. These tests vary in
length, depending on the component under test.
b. While tests are running, “P#-#” will appear on the left display; the #’s indicate the test number and sub-
test. The right display will show a countdown time in minutes and seconds, indicating the amount of time
remaining in the test.
! CAUTION
When a failure occurs during automatic testing, the unit will suspend operation awaiting oper-
ator intervention.
When an automatic test fails, it will be repeated once. A repeated test failure will cause “FAIL” to be
shown on the right display, with the corresponding test number to the left.
The user may then press the DOWN ARROW to repeat the test, the UP ARROW to skip to the next test,
or the PRE-TRIP key to terminate testing. The unit will wait indefinitely or until the user manually enters
a command.
! CAUTION
When pre-trip test Auto2 runs to completion without being interrupted, the unit will terminate
pre-trip and display “Auto 2” “end.” The unit will suspend operation until the user depresses
the ENTER key!
When an Auto 1 pre-trip test runs to completion without a failure, the unit will exit pre-trip mode and
return to normal control operation. However, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated man-
ually if required.
3. TO RUN AN INDIVIDUAL TEST: Scroll through the selections by pressing the UP ARROW or DOWN
ARROW keys to display an individual test code. Press ENTER when the desired test code is displayed.
a. Individually selected tests, other than the LED/Display test, will perform the operations necessary to ver-
ify the operation of the component. At the conclusion, PASS or FAIL will be displayed. This message will
remain displayed for up to three minutes, during which time a user may select another test. If the three
minute time period expires, the unit will terminate pre-trip and return to control mode operation.
b. While the tests are being executed, the user may terminate the pre-trip diagnostics by pressing and
holding the PRE-TRIP key. The unit will then resume normal operation. If the user decides to terminate a
test but remain at the test selection menu, the user may press the UP ARROW key. When this is done,
all test outputs will be de-energized and the test selection menu will be displayed.
c. During pre-trip testing, current limiting and pressure limiting are both active, except during P-7 (High
Pressure Switch Testing) when pressure limiting is turned off.
4. Pre-Trip Test Results
At the end of the pre-trip test selection menu, the message “P,” “rSLts” (pre-trip results) will be dis-
played. Pressing the ENTER key will allow the user to see the results for all subtests (i.e., 1-0, 1-1, etc).
The results will be displayed as “PASS” or “FAIL” for all the tests run to completion since power up. If a
test has not been run since power up, “- - - - -” will be displayed.
Once all Pre-test activity is completed, dehumidification and bulb mode must be reactivated manually if
required.
5–7 T-362
5.11 PROBE DIAGNOSTICS
A complete temperature probe check is performed during the P5 pre-trip test. A probe check is also run at the end
of a defrost cycle; the defrost light will remain on during this period. If supply probes are within limits and return
probes are within limits, the unit will return to normal operation. During normal operation, the controller continu-
ously monitors and compares adjacent temperature probe readings.
The probe check procedure consists of running the evaporator fans for up to eight minutes in order to compare the
readings from the adjacent temperature probes. If a significant difference in temperature readings is detected
between probes, a defrost cycle, followed by another probe check may be initiated. Any continued disagreement
between probes will prompt the controller to invalidate the failed temperature probe, and the backup probe will be
used for temperature control.
In Perishable Mode, both pairs of supply and return probes are monitored for probe disagreement. Probe disagree-
ment is considered a difference of 0.5°C (0.9°F) or greater between the supply air sensors and/ or a difference of
2.0°C (3.6°F) between the return air sensors. Probe disagreement found in either pair can trigger a defrost probe
check.
In Frozen Mode, only the controlling probes are considered. Disagreement of the controlling probes can trigger a
defrost probe check, which will occur when the difference between the sensors is greater than 2.0°C (3.6°F). Nor-
mally, the controlling probes are the return probes but if both return probes are invalidated, the supply probes are
used for control purposes. Probe disagreement of the non-controlling probe pair will not trigger a defrost probe
check.
If after the defrost probe check the supply probes agree and return probes agree, all supply and return sensors are
considered valid and the unit returns to normal control.
In the Case of Probe Disagreement:
If the supply probes disagree and the return probes agree, the controller will invalidate the worst supply probe. If the
probe check is run as part of pre-trip P-5, an alarm will be triggered for the invalidated probe. If it is a run time defrost
probe check, the invalidated probe will be passed over and no alarm will be triggered. However, if the best supply
probe is greater than 1.2°C (2.2°F) difference with respect to its return probes, the best supply probe is also invali-
dated. If unit is in Perishable Mode, a probe alarm will be triggered for both supply probes.
If the supply probes agree and the return probes disagree, invalidate the worst return probe. If the probe check is
being run as part of pre-trip P-5, an alarm will be triggered for the invalidated probe. If it is a run time defrost probe
check, the invalidated probe will be passed over and no alarm will be necessary. If the best return probe is greater
than 1.2°C (2.2°F) difference with respect to its supply probes, then the best return probe is also invalidated. If the
unit is in perishable mode, a probe alarm will be triggered for both return probes.
5.12 EMERGENCY BYPASS OPERATION (OPTION)

Emergency Bypass operation is used to override the controller, in the case of a controller malfunction, to keep the
unit cooling. When Emergency Bypass is installed and turned on, the unit will remain in a continuous state of full
cool until the Emergency Bypass switch is turned off.
To place the unit in the Emergency Bypass Operation:
1. Locate the connection diagram and connectors for the emergency bypass (EB) sensors behind the top left
side of the compressor.
2. Disconnect the emergency bypass connector from the controller connector and attach it to the emergency
bypass module connector (See Figure 5.3).
3. Locate the wire tire located at the EB switch in the control box.
4. Cut the wire tie, then place the EB switch in the On position.
5. Place the Mode Switch (MS) in the Full Cool position to enable the system for cooling.
6. Manually control container air temperature by cycling the Mode switch between Full Cool and evaporator
Fans Only.
To operate the fans only, the MODE switch must be in the Fans Only position and the EMERGENCY BYPASS
switch must be in the Bypass position.
The EBS module uses the system’s safety devices (high pressure switch, motor internal protectors, and heat termi-
nation thermostat) to protect the system while in Emergency Bypass Mode.
T-362 5–8
! CAUTION
The unit will remain in the full cooling mode as long as the EB switch is in the On position and
the Mode Switch is in the Full Cool position. If the cargo can be damaged by low temperatures,
the operator must monitor container temperature and manually cycle operation as required to
maintain temperature within required limits.
When the Emergency Bypass switch is in the Bypass position, the EBS will be enabled.
With the Mode switch in Full Cool mode, the following will occur simultaneously:
a. The EBS switch will enable EBS input.
b. The phase detection circuit will detect the phase rotation and close to provide power to the compressor con-
tactor.
c. The condenser fan contact will close to energize the condenser contactor and provide power to the con-
denser fan motor.
d. The evaporator fan contact will close to energize the high speed evaporator contactor and provide power to
the evaporator fan motor.
e. The EBS electronic module will operate the EEV to control superheat.
To return the unit to normal operation:

1. Locate the connectors behind the compressor.
2. Disconnect the Emergency Bypass connector from the EBS module connector and reconnect it to the con-
troller connector (see Figure 5.3).
3. Inside the control box, place the EB switch in the Off position.
4. Re-install the wire tie at the switch mounting.
Figure 5.3 Diagram of Emergency Bypass Connections
EMERGENCY BYPASS CONNECTOR
TO SENSORS TO CONTROLLER
Diagram Shows Connection

for Emergency Bypass Operation
TO BYPASS
MODULE
5–9 T-362
5.13 TRIPWISE (OPTION)
TripWiseTM is a new premium option available for PrimeLINE and PrimeLINE with Edge units. TripWise is software
logic that runs during every voyage as often as possible to indicate whether a standard Pre-trip Inspection is
needed and skip unless necessary. The tests run in the background and are similar to those completed as part of
the standard PTI selection, which includes the following:
• Alarm Presence • Defrost Temperature Sensor
• Evaporator Motor Current • Electronic Expansion Valve
• Heater Current • RMU Presence
• Condenser Motor Current • Compressor Test
• Compressor Current • Digital Loader / Unloader Valves
• Humidity Sensor • Economizer Valve
• Supply / Return Sensors • Temperature Control
• Evaporator Temperature and Pressure Sensors • Suction / Discharge Temperature and Pressure
5.13.1 Checking TripWise Status of the Container
To check the status of the container, press the PRE-TRIP key on the key-
pad. The message “SELCt | PrtrP” will appear on the display module, COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN
alternating with one of the following messages that shows TripWise status:
SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data
trIPW | OFF
The TripWise option is turned off. To activate, refer to procedure for
Enabling TripWise with Code Cd65. COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN
trIPW | EX (Expired)
It is recommended to pre-trip the unit following customer-specific guide-
lines prior to the unit's next trip. COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN
trIPW | PASS
The container should be ready for use after the operator has conducted a
visual inspection. Standard PTI is not required. COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN
trIPW | CHECK
If any TripWise test(s) execute and do not meet the pass / fail require-
ments, It is recommended to pre-trip the unit following customer-specific COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN
guidelines prior to the unit's next trip.
Pressing the ENTER key while “SELCt | PrtrP” is displayed will enter into the pre-trip test menu. Pressing
the arrow keys will navigate through the standard PTI test selections menu.
T-362 5–10
5.13.2 Enabling or Disabling TripWise with Function Code 65
2. Use the arrow keys to bring up code Cd65 in the display.
3. Press the ENTER key. The display will show either “-----”, “OFF” or “ON”.
NOTE
If “-----” is displayed, the TripWise function option is not active on the unit. To add this option to the unit,
the equipment owner would need to contact their Regional Carrier Sales Manager.
4. Use the arrow keys to toggle between “ON” and “OFF” and then press ENTER to select the desired option.
5. If “ON” is selected, the display will show “dAYS”. This is the expiration time (2 through 365 in 1 day incre-
ments). Use the arrow keys to change the parameter and then press ENTER to confirm.
NOTE
The expiration interval is the total maximum days allowed between the running of each test. For exam-
ple, if days are set to 30 and the low speed evaporator fan test has not run within those 30 days, the
TripWise expired message will be displayed. If the TripWise expired message is displayed, it is recom-
mended to pre-trip the unit following customer specific guidelines prior to the next trip.
5.13.3 TripWise Status Event

A TripWise status event will be recorded in the DataCorder recorder when the PTI is selected. In the current
DataLINE software release, the event will show the status of the unit.
Figure 5.4 TripWise Status in DataCorder
In DataLINE version 3.2, perform an all data download - select from the drop down menu “TripWise Summary” then
select a date in “User Logged Events”.
Figure 5.5 Generating TripWise Summary Report
5–11 T-362
This will generate the status / results in a DataLINE TripWise Summary Report.
Figure 5.6 TripWise Summary Report
Status
Results
T-362 5–12
5.14 AUTOMATIC COLD TREATMENT (OPTION)
Cold Treatment has been employed as an effective post-harvest method for the control of Mediterranean and certain
other tropical fruit flies. Exposing infested fruit to temperatures of 2.2°C (3.6°F) or below for specific time periods
results in the mortality of various life stages for this group of insects.
Automated Cold Treatment (ACT) in the Carrier Transicold unit is a method to simplify the task of completing cold
treatment by automating the process of changing the setpoints. ACT is set up through Code Selection Cd51. Refer
to Function Code table in this manual for Cd51 menu processing and displays.
Procedure to Set ACT:

1. Enter the required cargo setpoint. It must be lower than the treatment temperature that will be discussed in
step 4.
2. Press CODE SELECT, use the arrow keys to scroll to Cd51, and press ENTER.
3. "ACt" is now displayed in the left display and the right will display "Off". Use the arrow
key to scroll to "On" in the right display and press ENTER. COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN
4. “trEAt" is now displayed in the left display and the right will be flashing the last setting
(shown as XX.X°C). "trEAt" is the maximum value that the USDA probes need to COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN
remain below, to pass the Cold Treatment protocol. For instance, if the treat value is
set at 35.0°F (1.7°C) then the USDA probe temperatures must remain below 35.0°F SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data
(1.7°C) to pass.
5. "dAyS" is now displayed in the left display and the right will be flashing. Use the arrow
key to select the desired days for cold treatment and press ENTER. COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN
6. "ProbE" is now displayed in the left display and the right will display the probe num-
bers that are connected. Press ENTER. For instance, if "1234" is displayed, then all COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN
four of the probes are connected.

7. "SPnEW" is now displayed in the left display and the right will be flashing. Use the
arrow key to select the desired setpoint after the cold treatment process has success- COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN
fully completed and press ENTER. This would be the final temperature prior to the
delivery of the cargo.
8. Cd51 is now displayed in the left display and the right will display days / hours.
COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN
Once the cold treatment process has been initiated, setpoint change via the keypad is disabled.
The unit will start to countdown once all detected USDA probes have reached the cold treatment temperature in
step 4 above. The cold treatment process will continue until the number of days specified in step 5 is reached.
During operation, Cd51 will show the number of days and hours remaining in the cold treatment.
While the unit is operating in ACT mode, the left hand display will alternate between "COLd"
and setpoint. The right hand display will alternate between "trEAt" and the cargo tempera- COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN
ture. Once the treatment time has been completed, the setpoint temperature will increase to
the "SPnEW" setting chosen in step 7.
When the cold treatment process is complete, the "SPnEW" setpoint will be displayed in the
left hand display and cargo temperature in the right hand display, alternating with "COLd" COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN
"Done". "COLd" "Done" will continue to alternate with the setpoint and cargo temperature
until ACT is turned off.
ACT can be manually turned off by selecting Cd51, scrolling to "Off" and pressing ENTER.
ACT will be automatically turned off with a TripStart, or if a Pretrip is initiated. Automatic Setpoint Change (ASC/
Cd53) and ACT (Cd51) will not work simultaneously. Setting one will deactivate the other.
5–13 T-362
SECTION 6
TROUBLESHOOTING
CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE REMEDY/REFERENCE

SECTION
6.1 UNIT WILL NOT START OR STARTS THEN STOPS
External power source OFF Turn on
Start-Stop switch (ST) OFF or defective Check
No power to unit
Circuit breaker tripped or OFF Check
Autotransformer not connected Section 5.2.2
Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check
Control transformer defective Replace
Loss of control power
Fuse (F3A/F3B) blown Check
Evaporator fan motor internal protector open Section 7.17
Condenser fan motor internal protector open Section 7.9
Compressor internal protector open Section 7.9
Component(s) not operating
High pressure switch open Section 6.7
Heat termination thermostat open Replace
Malfunction of current sensor Replace
Low line voltage Check
Compressor hums, but does Single phasing Check
not start Shorted or grounded motor windings Section 7.9
Compressor seized Section 7.9
6.2 UNIT OPERATES LONG OR CONTINUOUSLY IN COOLING
Hot load Normal
Container
Defective box insulation or air leak Repair
Shortage of refrigerant Section 7.3
Evaporator coil covered with ice Section 6.6
Evaporator coil plugged with debris Section 7.15
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards Section 7.15/Section 7.17
Air bypass around evaporator coil Check
Controller set too low Reset
Compressor service valves or liquid line shutoff valve Open valves completely
Refrigeration system
partially closed
Dirty condenser Section 7.11.2
Compressor worn Section 7.9
Current limit (function code Cd32) set to wrong value Section 4.3.25
Economizer solenoid valve malfunction Section 7.25
Digital unloader valve stuck open Replace
Electronic expansion valve Replace
6–1 T-362
SECTION
6.3 UNIT RUNS BUT HAS INSUFFICIENT COOLING
Abnormal pressures Section 6.7
Abnormal temperatures Section 6.16
Abnormal currents Section 6.17
Controller malfunction Section 6.9
Evaporator fan or motor defective Section 7.17
Refrigeration system
Compressor service valves or liquid line shutoff valve Open valves completely
partially closed
Frost on coil Section 6.10
Digital unloader valve stuck open Replace
Electronic expansion valve Replace
6.4 UNIT WILL NOT HEAT OR HAS INSUFFICIENT HEATING
No operation of any kind Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check
External power source OFF Turn ON
Circuit breaker or fuse defective Replace
Control Transformer defective Replace
No control power Evaporator fan internal motor protector open Section 7.17
Heat relay defective Check
Heater termination thermostat open Section 7.15
Heater(s) defective Section 7.15
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Evaporator fan motor(s) defective or rotating back- Section 7.15/Section 7.17
wards
Unit will not heat or has Evaporator fan motor contactor defective Replace
insufficient heat
Defective wiring Replace
Loose terminal connections Tighten
Low line voltage Section 3.3
6.5 UNIT WILL NOT TERMINATE HEATING
Controller improperly set Reset
Unit fails to stop heating
Heater termination thermostat remains closed along Section 7.15
with the heat relay
6.6 UNIT WILL NOT DEFROST PROPERLY
Defrost timer malfunction (Cd27) Table 4–5
Loose terminal connections Tighten
Will not initiate defrost Defective wiring Replace
automatically Defrost temperature sensor defective or heat termina- Replace
tion thermostat open
T-362 6–2
SECTION
Manual defrost switch defective Replace
Will not initiate defrost
Keypad is defective Replace
manually
Defrost temperature sensor open Replace
Initiates but relay (DR) drops Low line voltage Section 3.3
out
Initiates but does not defrost
Heater(s) burned out Section 7.15
Frequent defrost Wet load Normal
6.7 ABNORMAL PRESSURES
Condenser coil dirty Section 7.11.2
Condenser fan rotating backwards Section 7.11
Condenser fan inoperative Section 7.12
High discharge pressure
Refrigerant overcharge or non-condensibles Section 7.3
Discharge service valve partially closed Open
Electronic expansion valve (EEV) control malfunction Replace
Incorrect software and/or controller configuration Check
Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evapora- Replace
tor pressure transducer (EPT)
Suction service valve partially closed\ Open
Filter drier partially plugged Section 7.14
Low suction pressure Low refrigerant charge Section 7.3
No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow Section 7.15
Excessive frost on evaporator coil Section 6.6
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards Section 7.17.3
EEV control malfunction Replace
Failed digital unloader valve (DUV) Replace
Compressor operating in reverse Section 6.15
Suction and discharge
pressures tend to equalize Compressor cycling/stopped Check
when unit is operating Failed digital unloader valve (DUV) Replace
6.8 ABNORMAL NOISE OR VIBRATIONS
Compressor start up after an extended shutdown Normal
Brief chattering when manually shut down
Compressor operating in reverse Section 6.15
Compressor
Loose mounting bolts or worn resilient mounts Tighten/Replace
Loose upper mounting Section 7.9.1
Loose slugging Section 7.15
Bent, loose or striking venturi Check
Condenser or Evaporator
Worn motor bearings Section 7.12/Section 7.17
Fan
Bent motor shaft Section 7.12/Section 7.17
6–3 T-362
SECTION
6.9 MICROPROCESSOR MALFUNCTION
Defective sensor Section 7.28
Will not control
Defective wiring Check
Low refrigerant charge Section 7.3
6.10 NO EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW OR RESTRICTED AIR FLOW
Frost on coil Section 6.6
Evaporator coil blocked
Dirty coil Section 7.15
Evaporator fan motor internal protector open Section 7.17
No or partial evaporator air Evaporator fan motor(s) defective Section 7.17
flow Evaporator fan(s) loose or defective Section 7.17
Evaporator fan contactor defective Replace
6.11 EAUTOFRESH NOT OPERATING
Unit not Configured for eAutoFresh Operation No action
Cd43 in Off mode Section 5.4
Wiring disconnected Check wiring
Vent not opening
Stepper drive defective Section 7.30
Stepper motor defective Section 7.30
Unit operating in frozen mode Section 5.4
Check CO2 sensor Section 5.4
Gas Limit mode unavailable Wiring disconnected Check wiring
Unit operating in frozen mode Section 5.4
“Enter” Key not held for sufficient length of time Section 5.4
Unable to calibrate CO2
CO2 outside of acceptable levels Check
sensor
Unit not Configured for eAutoFresh Operation No action
Code 44 displays “- - - - - “
6.12 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE MALFUNCTION
Suction service valve partially closed Open
Filter drier partially plugged Section 7.14
Low refrigerant charge Section 7.3
Low suction pressure
No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow Section 7.15
Excessive frost on evaporator coil Section 6.6
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards Section 7.17.3
EEV control malfunction Section 7.19
Failed digital unloader valve (DUV) Replace
Loose or insufficiently clamped sensor Replace
T-362 6–4
SECTION
Foreign material in valve Section 7.19
High suction pressure with tor pressure transducer (EPT)
low superheat EEV control malfunction Replace
Improperly seated powerhead Ensure powerhead is
locked and in place
Liquid slugging in tor pressure transducer (EPT)
compressor
Failed EEV Replace
6.13 AUTOTRANSFORMER MALFUNCTION
Circuit breaker (CB-1 or CB-2) tripped Check
Autotransformer defective Section 7.26
Unit will not start
Power source not turned ON Check
460 VAC power plug is not inserted into the receptacle Section 5.2.2
6.14 WATER-COOLED CONDENSER OR WATER PRESSURE SWITCH
Dirty coil
High discharge pressure Section 7.13
Non-condensibles
Condenser fan starts and Water pressure switch malfunction Check
stops Water supply interruption Check
6.15 COMPRESSOR OPERATING IN REVERSE
NOTE
The compressor may start in reverse for up to 10 seconds to determine correct phase rotation
if required for phase detection.
! CAUTION
Allowing the scroll compressor to operate in reverse for more than two minutes will result in
internal compressor damage. Turn the start- stop switch OFF immediately.
Incorrect wiring of compressor
Electrical Incorrect wiring of compressor contactor(s) Check
Incorrect wiring of current sensor
6–5 T-362
SECTION
6.16 ABNORMAL TEMPERATURES
Condenser coil dirty Section 7.11.2
Condenser fan rotating backwards Section 7.12
Condenser fan inoperative Section 7.12.1
Refrigerant overcharge or non-condensibles Section 7.3
Discharge service valve partially closed Open
Electronic expansion valve (EEV) control malfunction Replace
High discharge temperature Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evapora- Replace
Discharge temperature sensor drifting high Replace
Failed economizer expansion valve, economizer coil, Replace
or economizer solenoid valve
Plugged economizer expansion valve, economizer Replace
coil, or economizer solenoid valve
Loose or insufficiently clamped sensor Replace
6.17 ABNORMAL CURRENTS
Unit reads abnormal currents Current sensor wiring Check
T-362 6–6
SECTION 7
SERVICE
NOTE
Use a refrigerant recovery system whenever removing refrigerant. When working with refrigerants you
must comply with all local government environmental laws. In the U.S.A., refer to EPA section 608.
! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
NOTE
Annual maintenance procedures for PrimeLINE units 69NT40-561 can be found in the 62-10327 Annual
Maintenance Manual, located in the Literature section of the Container Refrigeration website. To find the
manual from the Literature section, click on Container Units > All Container Units > Operation.
7.1 SECTION LAYOUT

Service procedures are provided in this section beginning with refrigeration system service, then refrigeration sys-
tem component service, electrical system service, temperature recorder service and general service. Refer to the
Table of Contents to locate specific topics.
7.2 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET

The manifold gauge set (see Figure 7.1) is used to determine system operating pressure, add refrigerant charge,
and to equalize or evacuate the system.
Figure 7.1 Manifold Gauge Set
2 3
1
4
7 6 5
1. Suction Pressure Valve (shown backseated) 6. Utility Connection to:

2. Suction Pressure Gauge a. Refrigerant Cylinder
3. Discharge Pressure Gauge b. Vacuum Pump
c. Oil Container
4. Discharge Pressure Valve (shown frontseated)
7. Low Side Connection
5. High Side Connection
-----
When the Suction Pressure Valve (1) is frontseated (turned all the way in), the suction (low) pressure can be
checked at the Suction Pressure Gauge (2).
When the Discharge Pressure Valve (4) is frontseated, the discharge (high) pressure can be checked at the Dis-
charge Pressure Gauge (3).
When both valves are backseated (all the way out), high pressure vapor will flow into the low side.
When the Suction Pressure Valve (1) is open and the Discharge Pressure Valve (4) shut, the system can be
charged through the Utility Connection (6). Oil can also be added to the system.
7–1 T-362
A manifold gauge/hose set with self-sealing hoses (see Figure 7.2) is required for service of the models covered
within this manual. The manifold gauge/hose set is available from Carrier Transicold. (P/N 07-00294-00, which
includes items 1 through 6, Figure 7.2.)
NOTE
It is recommended that the manifold gauge set be dedicated to a specified refrigerant (R-134a or R-
513A).
7.2.1 Evacuating the Manifold Gauge Set

If the manifold gauge/hose set is new or was exposed to the atmosphere, it will need to be evacuated to remove
contaminants and air as follows:
1. Backseat (turn counterclockwise) both field service couplings (see Figure 7.2) and midseat both hand valves.
2. Connect the yellow hose to a vacuum pump and refrigerant cylinder.
3. Evacuate to 10 inches of vacuum and then charge with refrigerant to a slightly positive pressure of 0.1 kg /
cm2 (1.0 psig).
4. Frontseat both manifold gauge set valves and disconnect from cylinder. The gauge set is now ready for use.
Figure 7.2 Manifold Gauge/Hose Set
To Low Side To High Side

Access Valve Access Valve
2
6
1
4 3
7 4
2 5
1. RED Refrigeration and/or Evacuation Hose 4. Hose Fitting with O-ring (M14 x 1.5)
(SAE J2196/R-134a) 5. High Side Field Service Coupling (Red Knob)
2. Hose Fitting (0.5-16 Acme) 6. BLUE Refrigeration and/or Evacuation Hose (SAE
3. YELLOW Refrigeration and/or Evacuation J2196/R-134a)
Hose (SAE J2196/R-134a) 7. Low Side Field Service Coupling (Blue Knob)
-----
7.3 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

The compressor suction, compressor discharge, and the liquid line service valves (see Figure 7.3) are provided with a
double seat and an access valve which enables servicing of the compressor and refrigerant lines.
Turning the valve stem clockwise (all the way forward) will frontseat the valve to close off the line connection and
open a path to the access valve. Turning the stem counterclockwise (all the way out) will backseat the valve to
open the line connection and close off the path to the access valve.
With the valve stem midway between frontseat and backseat, both of the service valve connections are open to the
access valve path.
For example, the valve stem is first fully backseated when connecting a manifold gauge to measure pressure.
Then, the valve is opened 1/4 to 1/2 turn to measure the pressure.
T-362 7–2
Figure 7.3 Service Valve
Access Valve
Step Cap
Line Connection
Compressor or Filter Drier

Inlet Connection
Valve Stem
Valve (Frontseated) Valve (Backseated)
Connection of the manifold gauge / hose set (see Figure 7.4) is dependent on the component being serviced. If
only the compressor is being serviced, the high side coupling is connected to the discharge service valve.
For service of the low side (after pump down), the high side coupling is connected to the liquid line service valve.
The center hose connection is brought to the tool being used (vacuum, tank, etc.).
7.3.1 Connecting the Manifold Gauge Set

1. Remove the service valve stem cap and make sure the valve is backseated.
2. Remove the access valve cap (See Figure 7.3).
3. Connect the field service coupling (see Figure 7.2) to the access valve.
4. Turn the field service coupling knob clockwise to open the system to the gauge set.
5. Slightly midseat the service valve to read system pressures.
6. Repeat the procedure to connect the other side of the gauge set.
! CAUTION
To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the manifold gauge set, make sure set is brought to
suction pressure before disconnecting.
7.3.2 Removing the Manifold Gauge Set

1. While the compressor is still ON, backseat the high side service valve.
2. Midseat both hand valves on the manifold gauge set and allow the pressure in the manifold gauge set to be
drawn down to low side pressure. This returns any liquid that may be in the high side hose to the system.
3. Backseat the low side service valve.
4. Backseat both field service couplings and frontseat both manifold hand valves.
5. Remove couplings from the access valves.
6. Install both service valve stem caps and service port caps (finger-tight only).
7.4 PUMP DOWN THE UNIT

To service the filter drier, economizer, expansion valves, economizer solenoid valve, digital unloader valve or evap-
orator coil, pump the refrigerant into the high side of the unit:
! CAUTION
charge service valves closed (frontseated). Internal damage will result from operating the com-
7–3 T-362
7.4.1 Automatic Pump Down
1. To perform an Automatic Pump Down, use function code Cd59 Pump Down Logic. Refer to Cd59 descrip-
tion in Table 4–6 Controller Function Codes.
7.4.2 Manual Pump Down:

1. Attach manifold gauge set to the compressor suction and discharge service valves. Refer to Section 7.2.
2. Start the unit and run in the frozen mode, with controller set below -10°C (14°F), for 10 to 15 minutes.
3. Check function code Cd21 (refer to Section 4.2.2). The economizer solenoid valve should be open. If not,
continue to run until the valve opens.
4. Frontseat the liquid line service valve. When the suction reaches a positive pressure of 0.1 bar (1.4 psig),
place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0” to turn the unit Off.
5. Frontseat the suction service valve and discharge service valve. The refrigerant will be trapped between the
discharge service valve and the liquid line valve.
6. Before opening up any part of the system, a slight positive pressure should be indicated on the pressure
gauge. Remove power from the unit before opening any part of the system. If a vacuum is indicated, emit
refrigerant by cracking the liquid line valve momentarily to build up a slight positive pressure.
7. When opening up the refrigerant system, certain parts may frost. Allow the part to warm to ambient tempera-
ture before dismantling. This avoids internal condensation which puts moisture in the system.
8. After repairs have been made, make sure to perform a refrigerant leak check (refer to Section 7.5), and
evacuate and dehydrate the low side (refer to Section 7.6).
9. Check refrigerant charge. Refer to Section 7.7.1.
7.5 REFRIGERANT LEAK CHECKING
! WARNING
1. The recommended procedure for finding leaks in a system is with an appropriate electronic leak detector.
Testing joints with soapsuds is satisfactory only for locating large leaks.
2. If the system is without refrigerant, charge the system with refrigerant to build up pressure between 2.1 to
3.5 bar (30.5 to 50.8 psig). To ensure complete pressurization of the system, refrigerant should be charged
at the compressor suction valve and the liquid line service valve. Remove refrigerant cylinder and leak-
check all connections.
NOTE
Only refrigerant R-134a or R-513A, as specified for the unit model number, should be used to pressur-
ize the system. Any other gas or vapor will contaminate the system, which will require additional purg-
ing and evacuation of the system.
3. If required, remove refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery system and repair any leaks. Check for leaks.
4. Evacuate and dehydrate the unit. Refer to Section 7.6.
5. Charge unit. Refer to Section 7.7.
7.6 EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION
7.6.1 General
Moisture is detrimental to refrigeration systems. The presence of moisture in a refrigeration system can have many
undesirable effects. The most common are copper plating, acid sludge formation, “freezing-up” of metering devices
by free water, and formation of acids, resulting in metal corrosion.
T-362 7–4
7.6.2 Preparation
1. Evacuate and dehydrate only after completing a pressure leak test. Refer to Section 7.5.
2. Essential tools to properly evacuate and dehydrate any system include a vacuum pump (8m3/hr = 5 cfm vol-
ume displacement) and an electronic vacuum gauge. The pump is available from Carrier Transicold, P/N
07-00176-11. The micron gauge is P/N 07-00414-00.
3. If possible, keep the ambient temperature above 15.6°C (60°F) to speed evaporation of moisture. If the
ambient temperature is lower than 15.6°C (60°F), ice might form before moisture removal is complete. Heat
lamps or alternate sources of heat may be used to raise the system temperature.
4. Additional time may be saved during a complete system pump down by replacing the filter drier with a sec-
tion of copper tubing and the appropriate fittings. Installation of a new drier may be performed during the
charging procedure.
Figure 7.4 Refrigeration System Service Connections
Receiver or Water Cooled Condenser Compressor

Economizer Solenoid Valve
Discharge Service Connection

Liquid Service Connection
Suction Service Connection
Manifold Gauge Set
S D
Reclaimer
Vacuum Pump
Refrigerant Cylinder Electronic Vacuum Gauge
7.6.3 Evacuate and Dehydrate - Complete System
NOTE
Refer to Partial System procedure for information pertaining to partial system evacuation and dehydration.
1. Remove all refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery system.
2. The recommended method to evacuate and dehydrate the system is to connect evacuation hoses at the
compressor suction and liquid line service valve (see Figure 7.4). Make sure the service hoses are suited
for evacuation purposes.
NOTE
To prevent the area between the Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) and the compressor from being
isolated during evacuation, it is necessary to open the ESV using a magnet tool (Carrier Transicold P/
N 07-00512-00).
3. Remove the ESV coil from the valve body. Place the magnet tool over the valve stem. An audible click will
be heard when the ESV opens.
NOTE
Make sure to replace the valve coil before restating the unit. Starting the unit with the coil removed
from the valve will burn out the coil.
7–5 T-362
4. Test the evacuation setup for leaks by backseating the unit service valves and drawing a deep vacuum with
the vacuum pump and gauge valves open. Shut off the pump and check to see if the vacuum holds. Repair
leaks if necessary.
5. Midseat the refrigerant system service valves.
6. Open the vacuum pump and electronic vacuum gauge valves, if they are not already open. Start the vacuum
pump. Evacuate the unit until the electronic vacuum gauge indicates 2000 microns. Close the electronic
vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut off the vacuum pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure the vac-
uum holds.
7. Break the vacuum with either clean refrigerant (R-134a or R-513A as specified for the unit model number) or
dry nitrogen. Raise system pressure to roughly 0.14 bar (2 psig), monitoring it with the compound gauge.
8. If refrigerant was used, remove using a refrigerant recovery system. If nitrogen was used, relieve the pressure.
9. Repeat steps 6 and 7 one time.
10. Remove the copper tubing and change the filter drier. Evacuate unit to 500 microns. Close the electronic
vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut off the vacuum pump. Wait five minutes to see if vacuum
holds. This procedure checks for residual moisture and/or leaks.
11. With a vacuum still in the unit, the refrigerant charge may be drawn into the system from a refrigerant con-
tainer on weight scales.
7.6.4 Evacuate and Dehydrate - Partial System

1. If refrigerant charge has been removed from the low side only, evacuate the low side by connecting the
evacuation set-up at the compressor suction valve and the liquid service valve but leave the service valves
frontseated until evacuation is completed.
2. Once evacuation has been completed and the pump has been isolated, fully backseat the service valves to
isolate the service connections and then continue with checking and, if required, adding refrigerant in accor-
dance with normal procedures.
7.7 REFRIGERANT CHARGE
! WARNING
injury and / or property damage. Never use air or gases containing oxygen (O2) for leak testing
or operating the product. Charge only with refrigerants R-134a or R-513A as specified for the
unit model number: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Standard 700 specification.
7.7.1 Checking the Refrigerant Charge
NOTE
Use a refrigerant recovery system whenever removing refrigerant. When working with refrigerants you
must comply with all local government environmental laws. In the U.S.A., refer to EPA Section 608.
1. Connect the gauge manifold to the compressor discharge and suction service valves. For units operating on
a water-cooled condenser, change over to air-cooled operation.
2. Bring the container temperature to approximately 0°C (32°F) or below. Then set the controller setpoint to -
25°C (-13°F).
3. Partially block the condenser coil inlet air. If covering the lower portion of the coil is not sufficient, remove the
left hand infill panel and cover the left side of the coil. Increase the area blocked until the compressor dis-
charge pressure is raised to approximately 12.8 bar (185 psig).
4. On units equipped with a receiver, the level should be between the glasses. On units equipped with a water-
cooled condenser, the level should be at the center of the glass. If the refrigerant level is not correct, refer to
Section 7.7.2 and Section 7.7.3 to add or remove refrigerant as required.
T-362 7–6
7.7.2 Adding Refrigerant to System - Full Charge
1. Evacuate unit and leave in deep vacuum. Refer to Section 7.6.1.
2. Place refrigerant cylinder on scale and connect charging line from cylinder to liquid line valve. Purge
charging line at liquid line valve and then note weight of cylinder and refrigerant.
3. Open liquid valve on cylinder. Open liquid line valve halfway and allow liquid refrigerant to flow into the unit
until the correct weight of refrigerant has been added as indicated by scales. Refer to Section 3.2
4. It may be necessary to finish charging unit through suction service valve in gas form, due to pressure rise in
high side of the system.
5. Backseat the manual liquid line valve to close off the gauge port. Close liquid valve on cylinder.
6. Start the unit in cooling mode. Run for approximately 10 minutes and check the refrigerant charge.
7.7.3 Adding Refrigerant to System - Partial Charge

1. Examine the refrigerant system for any evidence of leaks, repair as necessary. Refer to Section 7.5.
2. Maintain the conditions outlined in Section 7.7.1.
3. Fully backseat the suction service valve and remove the service port cap.
4. Connect the charging line between suction service valve port and refrigerant cylinder. Open the VAPOR valve.
5. Partially frontseat (turn clockwise) the suction service valve and slowly add charge until the refrigerant
appears at the proper level. Be careful not to frontseat the suction valve fully. If the compressor is operated
in a vacuum, internal damage may result.
7.8 CONVERTING TO R-513A REFRIGERANT

This procedure only applies to R-513A-ready units for 69NT40-561-500 models. This conversion is only by
approval of the equipment owner.
1. The compressor will have a green dot on the DUV fitting to note that it can accept R-513A.
2. Recover all R-134a refrigerant from the unit, by following procedure in Section 7.6.
3. Change the filter drier.
4. Evacuate to 500 microns by placing the vacuum pump on the liquid line and suction service valve.
5. Charge the unit with a full charge of R-513A refrigerant, by following procedure in Section 7.7.2. Charge
amounts are found in Section 3.2 Refrigeration System Data.
! CAUTION
When charging the unit with R-513A refrigerant, charge as a liquid only. R-513A is an azeotrope
blend containing R-1234yf and R-134a. Charging or topping off as a vapor will result in an
incorrect mixture of blend in the system.
6. Upon completion, change the refrigerant label (Carrier P/N 76-50235-00) on the front of the unit indicating
the change in refrigerant.
7.9 COMPRESSOR
! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and power plug disconnected before replacing the compressor.
! WARNING
Before disassembly of the compressor, be sure to relieve the internal pressure very carefully
by slightly loosening the couplings to break the seal.
7–7 T-362
! CAUTION
7.9.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor

1. Turn the unit ON and run it in full cool mode for 10 minutes.
NOTE
If the compressor is not operational, frontseat the suction and discharge service valves and go to step
5 below.
2. Frontseat the manual liquid line valve and allow the unit to pull-down to 0.1 kg/cm2 (1 psig).
3. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0”, turn the unit circuit breaker (CB-1) OFF, and disconnect power to the unit.
4. Frontseat the discharge and suction service valves.
5. Remove all remaining refrigerant from the compressor using a refrigerant recovery system.
6. Remove the compressor terminal cover, disconnect the ground wire and pull the cable plug from the com-
pressor terminals. Install the terminal cover back after removing the power cable.
NOTE
Inspect the power cable (plug) terminals to ensure they are not deformed or have any signs of heat or
arcing. If any damage is noted, replace the power cable.
7. Remove the Rotalock fittings from the suction and discharge service connections, and uncouple the
unloader and economizer lines from the compressor.
8. Cut the dome temperature sensor (CPDS) wires. The replacement compressor comes with a CPDS already
assembled.
9. Remove and save the compressor base mounting bolts. Discard the four top resilient mounts and washers.
10. Remove (slide out) the old compressor from the unit.
11. Inspect compressor base plate for wear. Replace, if necessary.
12. Wire tie the compressor base plate to the compressor, and slide the new compressor into the unit. (Refer to
Figure 7.5).
Figure 7.5 Compressor Kit
O-Ring (Unloader Connection) Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor
Teflon Seal for Valve Connection (2)

O-Ring (Economizer Connection)
Compressor
Teflon Seal for Valve Connection (2)
Base Mounting Bolts

Power Cable Gasket, SST Washers
Ground Connection Screw
Resilient Mount
SST Washers
Mylar Washers
Power Cable Lubricant - Krytox
(Not Shown) Wire Ties
T-362 7–8
NOTE
DO NOT add any oil to the replacement compressor. Replacement compressor is shipped with full oil
charge of 60 oz.
13. Cut and discard the wire ties used to hold the base plate to the compressor.
14. Place the new SST washers on each side of the resilient mounts, and the new Mylar washer on the bottom
of it as shown in Figure 7.5. Install the four base mounting bolts loosely.
15. Place the new Teflon seals at the compressor suction and discharge ports as well as the O-rings at the
unloader and economizer line connection ports. Hand tighten all four connections.
16. Torque the four base-mounting screws to 6.2 mkg (45 ft-lbs).
17. Torque the compressor ports / connections.
SERVICE VALVE / CONNECTION TORQUE VALUE

Suction and Discharge Rotalocks 108.5 to 135.5 Nm (80 to 100 ft-lbs.)
Unloader connection 24.5 to 27 Nm (18 to 20 ft-lbs.)
Economized connection 32.5 to 35 Nm (24 to 26 ft-lbs.)
18. Connect (butt-splice and heat shrink) the new compressor dome temperature sensor with the old sensor
wires removed in step 8. Wire-tie any loose wiring as appropriate.
19. Evacuate the compressor to 1000 microns if the unit was pumped down before the replaced compressor
was removed. Otherwise, evacuate the complete unit and charge it with refrigerant (see Section 7.6.1 and
Section 7.7.1).
20. Open the compressor terminal cover and connect the compressor power cable following the steps below:
a. Liberally coat the orange gasket surfaces with the Krytox lubricant.
b. Install the orange gasket part onto the compressor fusite with the grooved or threaded side out. Ensure
that the gasket is seated onto the fusite base.
c. Coat the inside of the power plug (female) connector pins with the Krytox lubricant, and insert the plug
onto the compressor terminal connections. Make sure, the orange gasket has bottomed out onto the
fusite and it fits securely onto the terminal pins while fully inserted into the orange plug.
d. Connect the green ground wire to the grounding tab located inside the terminal box of the compressor
using the self-tapping grounding screw. Close the compressor terminal box using the terminal cover
removed in step 20.
21. Backseat all service valves, connect the power to the unit and run it for at least 20 minutes.
22. Perform a leak check of the system.
7.10 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH
7.10.1 Checking High Pressure Switch
! WARNING
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a pressure regulator.
NOTE
The high pressure switch is non-adjustable.
1. Remove switch as outlined in Figure 7.10.2.
2. Connect ohmmeter or continuity light across switch terminals. Ohm meter will indicate no resistance or con-
tinuity light will be illuminated if the switch closed after relieving compressor pressure.
3. Connect hose to a cylinder of dry nitrogen (see Figure 7.6).
7–9 T-362
Figure 7.6 High Pressure Switch Testing
Cylinder Valve and Gauge Pressure Gauge

(0 to 36 kg/cm2 = 0 to 400 psig)
Bleed-Off Valve
Pressure Regulator
1/4 inch Connection

Nitrogen Cylinder
4. Set nitrogen pressure regulator at 26.4 kg/cm2 (375 psig) with bleed-off valve closed.
5. Close valve on cylinder and open bleed-off valve.
6. Open cylinder valve. Slowly close bleed-off valve to increase pressure on switch. The switch should open at
a static pressure up to 25 kg/cm2 (350 psig). If a light is used, the light will go out. If an ohmmeter is used,
the meter will indicate open circuit.
7. Slowly open bleed-off valve to decrease the pressure. The switch should close at 18 kg/cm2 (250 psig).
7.10.2 Replacing High Pressure Switch

1. Remove the refrigerant charge.
2. Disconnect wiring from defective switch. The high pressure switch is located on the discharge connection or
line and is removed by turning counterclockwise.
3. Install a new high pressure switch after verifying switch settings.
4. Evacuate, dehydrate and recharge the system.
5. Start the unit, verify refrigeration charge and oil level.
7.11 CONDENSER COIL

The condenser coil consists of a series of parallel copper tubes expanded into copper fins and formed into a “C”
shape with the fourth side of the square formed by the side support bracket.
7.11.1 Condenser Coil Cleaning

To ensure optimal efficiency of the unit the condenser coil must be clean. The condenser coil should be cleaned at
least once a year, but more frequent cleaning may be required depending on operating conditions. The coil is
cleaned with fresh water sprayed in the reverse direction of the air flow to remove any debris from the coil. A high
pressure washer is not required, mains water pressure is sufficient.
! WARNING
Do not remove the condenser fan grille before turning power OFF and disconnecting the power plug.
1. Make sure the unit is powered off and the plug is disconnected.
2. Remove the condenser fan grille.
3. Starting from the top of the coil, use a water hose with a nozzle to wash the coil from the inside out.
4. Systematically wash across the inside top face of the coil until the water runs clean.
5. Wash down the center section, and then through the bottom of the coil, continue washing until the water
runs clear.
6. After the coil is clean, rinse the condenser fan to remove any dirt build up from the blades.
7. Replace the condenser fan grille ensuring that it is centered around the fan.
T-362 7–10
7.11.2 Condenser Coil Removal
1. Using a refrigerant reclaim system remove the refrigerant charge.
! WARNING
2. Remove the condenser fan grille, retain all bolts and washers for reuse.
3. Remove the condenser fan.
4. Remove the infill panels to the left and right of the condenser fan shroud.
5. Remove the condenser fan shroud.
6. Unplug the condenser fan motor.
7. Remove and retain sufficient putty from around the motor wire harness to allow the harness to be slid back
through the side support bracket.
8. Cut the top and bottom drain lines midway between the side support bracket and the first cable tie, approx
150mm (6”) from the side support bracket.
9. Remove and retain sufficient putty from around the drain lines to allow the tubes to be slid back through the
side support bracket.
10. Remove filter drier.
11. Unbraze the inlet connection to coil.
12. Remove the cushion clamps securing the liquid line to the top and bottom receiver brackets, retain all
clamps and securing hardware.
13. Place a support under the condenser coil before releasing the coil from the frame.
14. Remove the lower mounting bracket bolts from the inside of the coil.
15. Remove the top mounting bracket bolts and grille extension mount from inside the coil.
16. Remove the side support bracket mounting bolts.
17. Slide the condenser assembly with receiver out of the unit.
7.11.3 Condenser Coil Preparation

Before installing the new condenser coil, the receiver assembly and mounting hardware must be removed from the
old coil assembly:
1. From the old coil, unbolt the receiver assembly from side support bracket.
2. Unbraze the receiver assembly from the coil outlet line and remove from the coil assembly.
3. Unbolt the side support bracket from the top and bottom coil supports and remove from old coil.
4. Refit the side support bracket to the new coil ensuring that the top and bottom are flush mounted with the
coil support.
7.11.4 Condenser Coil Installation

Once the side support bracket has been secured to the new condenser coil, the entire assembly is ready to be
installed into the unit:
1. Slide the new condenser coil into place ensuring the coil inlet connection is mated to the pipework and that
the coil is fully supported.
2. Secure the condenser coil into the unit using the retained hardware; refit the mylar and fender washers:
a. Refit the side support bracket bolts.
b. Refit the top support bracket bolts as well as the top grille extension support.
c. Refit the bottom support bracket bolts.
7–11 T-362
3. Braze the condenser coil inlet connection.
4. Insert the receiver pipe work onto the coil outlet and loosely secure the receiver assembly to the side sup-
port bracket with the retained hardware.
5. Braze the outlet connection to the receiver assembly.
6. Install a new filter drier.
7. Replace the liquid line cushion clamps.
8. Secure the receiver assembly to the side support bracket.
9. Pressure / leak test the coil and filter drier connections. Refer to Section 7.5.
10. Evacuate the entire unit. Refer to Section 7.6.
11. Slide the top and bottom drain lines back into place through the side support bracket.
12. Using the two supplied straight connectors and contact adhesive reconnect the drain lines.
13. Slide the condenser fan motor wiring harness back through the side support bracket and refit to condenser motor.
14. Replace all wire ties that were removed to properly secure the drain line and wiring.
15. Reseal the wire harness and drain line penetrations with the putty.
16. Slide the condenser fan onto the motor shaft reversed but do not secure.
17. Refit the condenser fan shroud to the unit. Use the condenser fan as a guide to ensure the shroud is prop-
erly centered around the fan.
18. Remove the condenser fan, and place it on the shaft facing the correct direction. Adjust the fan to the cor-
rect position, 37mm (1.5”) from the fan shroud, see Figure 7.7.
Figure 7.7 Condenser Fan Position
37mm (1.5”)
Fan
Shroud
19. Use Loctite “H” on the fan set screws, and tighten.
20. Refit left and right infill panels.
21. Refit the condenser fan grille, ensuring the grille is properly centered around the condenser fan.
22. Evacuate the entire unit. Refer to Section 7.6.
23. Recharge the unit with the charge shown on the unit serial plate. Refer to Section 7.7. It is important for
proper unit operation that the charge is weighed into the unit.
T-362 7–12
7.12 CONDENSER FAN AND FAN MOTOR
The condenser fan rotates counter-clockwise (viewed from front of unit). The fan pulls air through the condenser
coil, and discharges the air horizontally through the front of the unit.
7.12.1 Condenser Fan Motor Remove/Replace
! WARNING
1. Remove the condenser fan grille, retain all bolts and washers for reuse.
2. Remove the condenser fan by loosening the two set screws.
3. Disconnect the condenser fan motor wiring.
! CAUTION
Take necessary steps (place plywood over coil or use sling on motor) to prevent motor from
falling into condenser coil.
4. Note the number of shims on each side of the motor as the same configuration will be required to refit the
new motor.
5. Remove the fan motor mounting hardware and remove motor.
6. Loosely mount the new motor using new lock nuts.
7. Connect the fan motor wiring to the new fan motor.
8. Replace the shims in the same configuration as they were removed.
9. Tighten the fan motor mounting bolts to properly secure the motor.
10. To make sure that the motor is aligned properly, slide the condenser fan onto the motor shaft reversed but
do not secure.
11. Rotate the fan to make sure the fan blades do not contact the shroud:
a. If the fan motor is misaligned vertically, add or remove shims to align.
b. If the fan motor is not properly centered, loosen the mounting bolts, and adjust the motor position on the
bracket, and then secure the motor.
12. Remove the condenser fan, and connect the fan motor wiring to the fan motor.
13. Place the condenser fan on the shaft facing the correct direction. Adjust the fan to the correct position,
37mm (1.5”) from the fan shroud, see Figure 7.7.
14. Use Loctite “H” on the fan set screws, and tighten.
15. Refit the left and right infill panels.
16. Refit the condenser fan grille, ensuring the grille is properly centered around condenser fan.
7.13 WATER-COOLED CONDENSER CLEANING

The water-cooled condenser is of the shell and coil type with water circulating through the cupro-nickel coil. The
refrigerant vapor is admitted to the shell side and is condensed on the outer surface of the coil.
Rust, scale and slime on the water-cooling surfaces inside of the coil interfere with the transfer of heat, reduce sys-
tem capacity, cause higher head pressures and increase the load on the system.
By checking the leaving water temperature and the actual condensing temperature, it can be determined if the con-
denser coil is becoming dirty. A larger than normal difference between leaving condensing water temperature and
actual condensing temperature, coupled with a small difference in temperature of entering and leaving condensing
water, is an indication of a dirty condensing coil.
If the water-cooled condenser is dirty, it may be cleaned and de-scaled.
7–13 T-362
7.13.1 Cleaning Supplies Needed
• Oakite Aluminum Cleaner® 164, available as a powder in 20 kg (44 lb) pails and 205 kg (450 lb) drums.
• Oakite Composition No. 32, available as a liquid in cases, each containing 3.785 liters (4 U.S. gallon) bottles
and also in carboys of 52.6 kg (116 lbs) net.
• Fresh clean water.
• Acid proof pump and containers or bottles with rubber hose.
NOTE
When Oakite Compound No. 32 is used for the first time, the local Oakite technical service representative
should be called in for suggestions in planning the procedure. The representative will advise the reader
on how to do the work with a minimum dismantling of equipment: how to estimate the time and amount of
compound required; how to prepare the solution; how to control and conclude the de-scaling operation by
rinsing and neutralizing equipment before putting it back into service. The representative’s knowledge of
metals, types of scale, water conditions and de-scaling techniques will be highly useful.
7.13.2 Cleaning Procedure Summary

1. Turn the unit off and disconnect main power.
2. Disconnect the water pressure switch tubing by loosening the two flare nuts. Install a 1/4 inch flare cap on
the water-cooled condenser inlet tube (replaces tubing flare nut). De-scale tubing if necessary.
3. Drain water from the condenser tubing circuit.
4. Clean the water tubes with Oakite Aluminum Cleaner® 164 to remove mud and slime.
5. Flush.
6. De-scale the water tubes with Oakite No. 32 to remove scale.
7. Flush.
8. Neutralize.
9. Flush.
10. Put the unit back in service under normal load and check head (discharge) pressure.
7.13.3 Cleaning Procedure Detailed

1. Drain and flush the water circuit of the condenser coil. If scale on the tube inner surfaces is accompanied by
slime, a thorough cleaning is necessary before de-scaling process can be accomplished.
2. To remove slime or mud, use Aluminum Cleaner® 164. Mix 170 grams (6 ounces) per 3.785 liters (1 U.S.
gallon) of water. Mix cleaner in one half the volume of water, while stirring, and then add remaining water.
Warm this solution and circulate through the tubes until all slime and mud has been removed.
3. After cleaning, flush the tubes thoroughly with fresh clean water.
4. Prepare a 15% by volume solution for de-scaling, by diluting Oakite Compound No. 32 with water. This is
accomplished by slowly adding 0.47 liter (1 U.S. pint) of the acid (Oakite No. 32) to 2.8 liters (3 U.S. quarts)
of water.
! WARNING
Oakite No. 32 is an acid. Be sure that the acid is slowly added to the water. DO NOT PUT
WATER INTO THE ACID - this will cause spattering and excessive heat.
! WARNING
Wear rubber gloves and wash the solution from the skin immediately if accidental contact
occurs. Do not allow the solution to splash onto concrete.
5. Fill the tubes with this solution by filling from the bottom. See Figure 7.8.
T-362 7–14
Figure 7.8 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning - Forced Circulation
Priming Connection (Centrifugal pump Vent

50 gpm at 35’ head)
Pump Globe valves Close vent pipe valve
when pump is running
Suction
Condenser
Tank
Remove water regulating valve
Pump support Return
Fine mesh screen
NOTE
It is important to provide a vent at the top for escaping gas.
6. Allow the Oakite No. 32 solution to soak in the tube coils for several hours, periodically pump-circulating it
with an acid-proof pump.
An alternate method may be used whereby a pail (see Figure 7.9) filled with the solution and attached
to the coils by a hose can serve the same purpose by filling and draining. The solution must contact the
scale at every point for thorough de-scaling. Air pockets in the solution should be avoided by regularly
opening the vent to release gas. Keep flames away from the vent gases.
7. The time required for de-scaling will vary, depending upon the extent of the deposits. One way to determine
when de-scaling has been completed is to titrate the solution periodically, using titrating equipment provided
free by the Oakite technical service representative. As scale is being dissolved, titrate readings will indicate
that the Oakite No. 32 solution is losing strength. When the reading remains constant for a reasonable time,
this is an indication that scale has been dissolved.
Figure 7.9 Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning - Gravity Circulation
Fill condenser with cleaning solution. Do not add

solution more rapidly than vent can exhaust gases
caused by chemical reaction.
1” pipe
Approximately 5’
Vent pipe
3’ to 4’
Condenser
8. When de-scaling is complete, drain the solution and flush thoroughly with water.
7–15 T-362
NOTE
If condenser cooling water is not being used as drinking water or is not re-circulated in a closed or
tower system, neutralizing is not necessary.
9. Following the water flush, circulate a 56.7 gram (2 ounce) per 3.785 liter (1 U.S. gallon) solution of Oakite
Aluminum Cleaner® 164 through the tubes to neutralize. Drain this solution.
10. Flush the tubes thoroughly with fresh water.
11. Put the unit back in service and operate under normal load. Check the head pressure. If normal, a thorough
de-scaling has been achieved.
What You Can Do For Further Help:

Contact the Engineering and Service Department of OAKITE PRODUCTS CO., 675 Central Avenue, New Provi-
dence, NJ 07974 U.S.A. (or visit www.oakite.com)
7.14 FILTER DRIER

On units equipped with a water-cooled condenser, if the sight glass appears to be flashing or bubbles are con-
stantly moving through the sight glass, the unit may have a low refrigerant charge or the filter drier could be par-
tially plugged.
7.14.1 Checking the Filter Drier:

1. Test for a restricted or plugged filter drier by feeling the liquid line inlet and outlet connections. If the outlet
side feels cooler than the inlet side, then the filter drier should be changed.
2. Check the moisture-liquid indicator. If the indicator shows a high level of moisture, the filter drier should be
replaced.
7.14.2 Replacing the Filter Drier:

1. Pump down the unit (refer to Section 7.4). If the unit is not equipped with service values, evacuate the unit.
Then replace filter drier.
2. Evacuate the low side in accordance with Section 7.6.
3. After unit is in operation, inspect for moisture in the system and check charge.
7.15 EVAPORATOR COIL

The evaporator section, including the evaporator coil, should be cleaned regularly. The preferred cleaning fluid is
fresh water or steam. Another recommended cleaner is Oakite 202 or similar, following manufacturer’s instructions.
The two drain pan hoses are routed behind the condenser fan motor and compressor. The drain pan line(s) must
be open to ensure adequate drainage.
7.15.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement

1. Pump unit down. (Refer to Section 7.4).
! WARNING
2. With power OFF and power plug removed, remove the screws securing the panel covering the evaporator
section (upper panel).
3. Disconnect the defrost heater wiring.
4. Remove the mounting hardware from the coil.
5. Unsolder the two coil connections, one at the distributor and the other at the coil header.
6. Disconnect the defrost temperature sensor (refer to Section 7.28) from the coil.
7. Remove middle coil support.
T-362 7–16
8. After defective coil is removed from unit, remove defrost heaters and install on replacement coil.
9. Install coil assembly by reversing above steps.
10. Leak check connections. Evacuate and add refrigerant charge.
7.16 EVAPORATOR HEATERS
Figure 7.10 Heater Arrangement
Bracket
Heater Element
Retainer
The heaters are wired directly back to the contactor and if a heater failure occurs during a trip, the heater set containing
that heater may be disconnected at the contactor.
The next pre-trip (P1) will detect that a heater set has been disconnected and indicate that the failed heater should be
replaced.
7.16.1 Megger Testing the Heaters
! WARNING
All of the checks performed during this procedure should be carried out using a 500v Meg-ohm tester.
1. Connect the ground wire from the insulation tester to a fixed ground point, preferably the ground plate in the
control box.
2. At the load side of the heater contactor, check the insulation resistance to ground.
If readings are > 2 Mohm, then the heaters are operating properly and no action is needed.
If readings are < 1 Mohm, then the faulty heater needs to be identified. Proceed to step 3 for units with a
heater access panel or step 4 for units without a heater access panel.
If readings are between 1 and 2 Mohm, then the heaters need to be re-tested with the following steps:
! WARNING
a. Reconnect the unit to power and power the unit on.
b. Set the unit set point to a minimum of 10°C higher than the current temperature of the container. Allow
the unit to go into heat mode, reach the temperature set point and maintain for 10-15 minutes.
c. Power the unit off. Allow the unit to cool to ambient temperature.
d. Connect the ground wire from the insulation tester to a fixed ground point, preferably the ground plate in
the control box.
7–17 T-362
e. At the load side of the heater contactor, check the insulation resistance to ground.
If readings are > 1 Mohm, then the heaters are operating properly and no action is needed.
If readings are < 1 Mohm, then the faulty heater needs to be identified. Proceed to step 3 for units
with a heater access panel or step 4 for units without a heater access panel.
3. Identify the faulty heater(s) for units with a heater access panel:
a. Open the access panel and cut out all wire splices to isolate all heaters inside of the unit.
b. Repeat the Megger test on each individual heater. Connect the ground clip to the outer metal sheath of
the heater and the test clip to one of the wires from the same heater.
c. Replace any heater where the readings are < 1 Mohm.
4. Identify the faulty heater(s) for units without a heater access panel:
a. Remove all six connections from the Heater (HR) contactor load side, which splits the six heaters into
three separate pairs.
b. Identify the following three wires: DHTL, DHML, DHBL. There is one from each load connection.
c. Repeat the Megger test on each pair of heaters to identify the faulty heater pair. Connect the ground clip
from the insulation tester to a fixed ground point on the unit, preferably the ground plate in the control
box. Connect the test clip to one of the wires stated above.
d. Test all three wires and replace any heater pair that has readings < 1 Mohm.
5. If the unit is loaded, and the heater can not be immediately replaced, perform the following steps:
a. Identify the wire at the opposite end of the faulty heater pair: DHTL - DHTR, DHML - DHMR, DHBL -
DHBR.
b. Isolate the two wires.
c. Reconnect the remaining good wiring pairs to their original connections.
d. The unit will fail the PTI test P1-0 at the next pre-trip inspection. Repair action can be taken at that time.
6. If the unit is empty, replace the faulty heater:
! WARNING
Before servicing the unit, make sure the circuit breakers (CB-1 & CB-2) and start-stop switch
(ST) are in the OFF position and the power plug is disconnected.
a. With the heater pair identified, remove the upper back panel inside the container.
b. Identify the center point connection for the heater pair (black wiring from heaters) either against the unit
back wall or in the wiring loom.
c. Cut the splice to separate the two heaters.
d. Carry out a Megger check on the two heaters in the same way as for units with heater panel. Replace
any heater where the Megger readings are < 1 Mohms.
NOTE
If all heaters are above the acceptable limit with the wiring disconnected, then this indicates that the
fault was in one or more of the wire splices that were removed.
e. Remove the hold-down clamp securing the heater(s) to the coil.
f. Verify that the heaters are not hot before handling them.
g. Lift the bent end of the heater (with the opposite end down and away from the coil). Move the heater to
the side enough to clear the heater end support and remove.
h. To install heater, reverse steps.
T-362 7–18
i. Reconnect all wiring using new splices and heat shrink where needed. The heat shrink MUST have a
'melt-able' liner to ensure that the connections are properly sealed when shrunk. This can be seen as a
'Ring' of melt liner pushed from under the heat shrink at each end of the shrink tube.
NOTE
Failure to use melt liner heat shrink allows moisture to 'wick' up under the heat shrink and cause a
leakage path.
7.17 EVAPORATOR FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY

The evaporator fans circulate air throughout the container by pulling air in the top of the unit. The air is forced
through the evaporator coil where it is either heated or cooled and then discharged out the bottom of the refrigera-
tion unit into the container. The fan motor bearings are factory lubricated and do not require additional grease.
7.17.1 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly
! WARNING
1. Remove the access panel by removing the mounting bolts and TIR locking device. Reach inside of the unit
and remove the Ty-Rap securing the wire harness loop. Disconnect the connector by twisting to unlock and
pulling to separate.
2. Loosen four 1/4-20 clamp bolts that are located on the underside of the fan deck at the sides of the fan
assembly. Slide the loosened clamps back from the fan assembly.
3. Slide the fan assembly out from the unit and place on a sturdy work surface.
7.17.2 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly

1. Attach a spanner wrench to the two 1/4-20 holes located in the fan hub. Loosen the 5/8-18 shaft nut by hold-
ing the spanner wrench stationary and turning the 5/8-18 nut counter-clockwise (see Figure 7.11).
2. Remove the spanner wrench. Use a universal wheel puller and remove the fan from the shaft. Remove the
washers and key.
3. Remove the four 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts that are located under the fan that support the motor and stator
housing. Remove the motor and plastic spacer.
7.17.3 Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly

1. Assemble the motor and plastic spacer onto the stator.
NOTE
When removing the black nylon evaporator fan blade, care must be taken to assure that the blade is
not damaged. In the past, it was a common practice to insert a screwdriver between the fan blades to
keep it from turning. This practice can no longer be used, as the blade is made up of a material that
will be damaged. It is recommended that an impact wrench be used when removing the blade. Do not
use the impact wrench when reinstalling, as galling of the stainless steel shaft can occur.
2. Apply Loctite to the 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts and torque to 0.81 mkg (70 inch-pounds).
3. Place one 5/8 flat washer on the shoulder of the fan motor shaft. Insert the key in the keyway and lubricate
the fan motor shaft and threads with a graphite-oil solution (such as Never-seez).
4. Install the fan onto the motor shaft. Place one 5/8 flat washer with a 5/8-18 locknut onto the motor shaft and
torque to 40 foot-pounds.
7–19 T-362
Figure 7.11 Evaporator Fan Assembly
Washer
Nut
Fan
Stator
Screws/Washers
Protector
Motor
5. Install the evaporator fan assembly in reverse order of removal. Torque the four 1/4-20 clamp bolts to 0.81
mkg (70 inch-pounds). Connect the wiring connector.
6. Replace the access panel making sure that the panel does not leak. Make sure that the TIR locking device
is lockwired. Torque the access panel hardware to 69 kg-cm (60 in/lbs.) using a crossing pattern as shown
in Figure 7.12. Repeat the pattern twice for a proper seal.
Figure 7.12 Access Panel Torque Pattern
7.18 EVAPORATOR SECTION CLEANING

Containers and Container units that are exposed to certain fumigants may develop visible surface corrosion. This
corrosion will show up as a white powder found on the inside of the container and on the reefer unit evaporator sta-
tor and fan deck.
Analysis by Carrier Transicold environmental specialists have identified the white powder as consisting predomi-
nantly of aluminum oxide. Aluminum oxide is a coarse crystalline deposit most likely the result of surface corrosion
on the aluminum parts within the container. If left untreated over time, it may build up in thickness and eventually
flake as a light-weight white powder.
T-362 7–20
The surface corrosion of aluminum is brought about by exposure to chemicals such as sulfur dioxide and possibly
other fumigants that are commonly used for fumigation and protection of some perishable cargo such as grapes,
for example. Fumigation is the process by which a chemical is released into an enclosed area to eliminate infesta-
tions of insects, termites, rodents, weeds and soil-born disease.
Typically any aluminum oxide that becomes detached from evaporator fan stators will be blown into the wet evapo-
rator coil where it will be caught and then flushed out of the unit during routine defrost cycles.
However, it is still highly recommended that after carrying cargo subject to fumigation procedures, that the inside of
the unit be thoroughly cleansed prior to reuse.
Carrier Transicold has identified a fully biodegradable and environmentally safe alkaline cleaning agent (Tri-Pow’r®
HD) for the unit. This will assist in helping to remove the corrosive fumigation chemicals and dislodging of the cor-
rosive elements.
This cleaner is available from the Carrier Transicold Performance Parts Group (PPG) and can be ordered through
any of the PPG locations; Part Number NU4371-88.
As a general safety precaution, before using this product, refer to and retain the Material Safety Data (MSDS) sheet.
7.18.1 Cleaning Preparation

• Always wear goggles, gloves and work boots.
• Avoid contact with skin and clothing, and avoid breathing mists.
• When mixing, add water to the sprayer first, then the cleaner.
• ALWAYS provide for proper ventilation when cleaning indoor evaporator coils (rear doors must be open).
• Be aware of surroundings - food, plants, etc., and the potential for human exposure.
• Always read directions and follow recommended dilution ratios. More is not always better. Using non-diluted
cleaner is not recommended.
7.18.2 Cleaning Procedure

1. Remove the upper evaporator access panel inside of the unit.
2. Spray the surface with water before applying the cleaning solution. This helps the cleaner work better.
3. Liberally apply the prepared cleaner solution (5 parts water and 1 part cleaner).
4. Allow the cleaner to soak in for five to seven minutes.
5. Assess area for rinsing. Follow all local regulations regarding disposal of waste water.
6. Thoroughly rinse the cleaner and surrounding area, floor, etc. When rinsing where heavy foaming solution is
present, it is very important to take the time to thoroughly rinse the equipment and surroundings.
7. Always rinse the empty coil cleaner bottle, cap tightly and dispose of properly.
7.19 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (EEV)

The electronic expansion valve (EEV) is an automatic device which maintains required superheat of the refrigerant
gas leaving the evaporator. The valve functions are: (a) automatic response of refrigerant flow to match the evapo-
rator load and (b) prevention of liquid refrigerant entering the compressor. Unless the valve is defective, it seldom
requires any maintenance.
7.19.1 Removing an EEV
! WARNING
1. Pump down the compressor (refer to Section 7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge valves.
2. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit.
3. Remove the coil.
7–21 T-362
4. Remove the valve. The preferred method of removing the valve is to cut the connection between the brazed
section and the valve, using a small tube cutter. Remove the valve.
Alternatively, use a wet rag to keep the valve cool. Heat inlet and outlet connections to valve body and
remove valve.
5. Clean the valve stem with mild cleaner, if necessary.
7.19.2 Installing an EEV

1. Install the valve and a new strainer with the cone of the strainer / screen pointing into the liquid line at the
inlet to the valve.
2. During installation, make sure the EEV coil is snapped down fully, and the coil retention tab is properly
seated in one of the valve body dimples. Also, ensure that coil boot is properly fitted over valve body. See
Figure 7.13.
Figure 7.13 Electronic Expansion Valve
Coil Boot
Coil
Electronic Expansion
Valve
Flow
Direction
Strainer
3. Replace the filter drier.

4. Evacuate to 500 microns by placing the vacuum pump on the liquid line and suction service valve.
5. Open the liquid line service valve and check refrigerant level.
6. Check superheat. Refer to Section 3.2.
7. Check unit operation by running a pre-trip. Refer to Section 4.7.
7.20 HUMIDITY SENSOR

The humidity sensor is an optional component that allows setting of a humidity set point in the controller. In dehu-
midification mode, the controller will operate to reduce internal container moisture level.
7.20.1 Checking the Operation of the Humidity Sensor
This procedure is to be performed in an effort to ease the troubleshooting of the humidity sensor. When performing
this procedure and while working on the unit, always follow the proper lockout/tagout procedures.
Items Required:
• One 7/16” socket wrench or nut driver.

• One 1/4” socket wrench or nut driver.
• One clean, clear water bottle with a minimum 6 cm (2.5 in) opening and capacity to hold 500 ml (16.9 oz).
• 100 ml (3.4 oz) of fresh water - distilled if available.
• 50 gm of Salt (NaCl).
T-362 7–22
Procedure:
1. Remove the left Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent panel.

2. Remove the humidity sensor from the mounting hardware and bring to the front of the access panel.
3. Disconnect the humidity sensor from the harness.
4. Drill a 3 cm (1.25 in) hole in the cap of a bottle.
5. Pour approximately 100 ml (3.4 oz) of water into the empty clean bottle.
6. Add salt to the water until it is present at the bottom of the bottle.
7. Cap the bottle and tape over the drilled hole.
8. Shake the bottle until the salt dissolves and water is saturated.
NOTE
To ensure saturation, add additional salt until it settles at the bottom without dissolving while shaking.
9. Remove the cap and insert the humidity sensor into the bottle through the bottle opening and pull the con-
nector back through the drilled hole in the cap. Then, secure the cap and seal the wire going through the
cap.
NOTE
Make sure that the sensor is not at all in contact with the salt water.
Cap opening (6 cm) Cap hole (3 cm)
Humidity Sensor
Salt water solution
10. Allow the saturated salt mixture to settle for approximately ten minutes.
11. Reconnect the humidity sensor to the harness and power the reefer unit on.
13. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys until “Cd17” is displayed then press ENTER. This displays the humidity
sensor reading.
COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN
14. Verify the reading is between 60% and 85% relative humidity.
15. If the humidity sensor display is outside of this range, reconfirm the salt mixture and retest. If not in range,
replace the sensor at the next opportunity.
7–23 T-362
16. Wipe clean and reinstall the humidity sensor and access panel. Torque the access panel hardware to 69 kg-
cm (60 in.-lbs.) using a crossing pattern similar to the numbering below.
17. If the panel gasket is damaged and needs to be replaced, use the following part numbers:
• 42-00296-01: Standard Panel Gasket
• 42-00823-00: XtendFRESH Panel Gasket
7.21 ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE

Figure 7.14 Coil View of Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
Slotted Screw
Top Coil (small) O-ring
Solenoid Coil, Enclosing Tube and Body
Bottom Coil (large) O-ring
Brass Spacer
7.21.1 Removing a Solenoid Valve Coil
! WARNING
1. Turn unit power off and remove power from the unit. Disconnect leads.
2. Remove the top screw and o-ring. Remove the coil and save mounting hardware, seals and spacer for
reuse (see Figure 7.14). Refer to Valve Coil Installation Procedure.
7.21.2 Removing the Solenoid Valve

1. Pump down the compressor (refer to Section 7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge valves.
2. Remove the valve. The preferred method of removing the solenoid valve is to cut the connection between
the brazed section and the valve, using a small tube cutter. Remove valve.
Alternatively, heat inlet and outlet connections to valve body and remove valve.
3. Clean the valve stem with mild cleaner, if necessary.
7.21.3 Installing the Solenoid Valve

1. Fit the new solenoid valve into position and braze. Use a wet rag to keep valve cool whenever brazing.
T-362 7–24
7.21.4 Installing the Solenoid Valve Coil
1. Install the brass spacer on the valve stem.
2. Lubricate both o-rings with silicone provided in the kit.
3. Install bottom coil o-ring on the valve stem.
4. Install the solenoid coil on the valve stem.
5. Place the top coil o-ring on the coil mounting screw and secure the coil to the valve using a torque wrench.
Torque the screw to 25 in-lbs.
6. Connect coil wires using butt-splices and heat shrink tubing.
7.22 ECONOMIZER EXPANSION VALVE

The economizer expansion valve (See Figure 7.15) is an automatic device that maintains constant superheat of
the refrigerant gas leaving at the point of bulb attachment, regardless of suction pressure.
Unless the valve is defective, it seldom requires maintenance other than periodic inspection to ensure that the ther-
mal bulb is tightly secured to the suction line and wrapped with insulating compound.
NOTE
The economizer expansion valve is a hermetic valve, it does not have adjustable superheat.
Figure 7.15 Economizer Expansion Valve
Inlet
Outlet
7.22.1 Removing the Economizer Expansion Valve

1. Pump down the compressor (refer to Section 7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge valves. If unit is
not equipped with service valves, evacuate unit. Refer to Section 7.6.1.
3. Remove cushion clamps located on the inlet and outlet lines.
4. Remove insulation (Presstite) from the expansion valve bulb.
5. Unstrap the bulb, located on the economizer line.
6. Remove the valve. The preferred method of removing the valve is to cut the connection between the brazed
section and the valve, using a small tube cutter. Remove valve. Alternatively, use a wet rag to keep valve
cool. Heat inlet and outlet connections to valve body and remove valve.
7. Clean the valve stem with a mild cleaner, if necessary.
7.22.2 Installing the Economizer Expansion Valve

1. The economizer expansion valve should be wrapped in a soaked cloth for brazing.
2. Braze the inlet connection to the inlet line.
3. Braze the outlet connection to the outlet line.
4. Reinstall the cushion clamps on the inlet and outlet lines.
7–25 T-362
5. Replace the filter drier. Refer to Section 7.14.
6. Evacuate to 500 microns by placing vacuum pump on liquid line and suction service valve.
7. Check economizer expansion valve superheat (see Section 3.2).
7.23 TROUBLESHOOTING P6-7 (DUV)

A failed digital unloader valve (DUV), which is normally closed, or an internal seal failure of the compressor can
result in the unit running continually in the fully loaded mode causing it to undershoot its setpoint temperature.
Both of these conditions can be evaluated by running pre-trip test P6-7. When running P6-7, the controller is look-
ing for the differences in pressure and current draw between loaded mode and unloaded mode to make a judg-
ment. If there are no differences, then it will show fail.
To confirm what caused the test to fail, perform the following additional test.
1. Connect the manifold gauge set to discharge service valve (DSV) and suction service valve (SSV).
2. Front seat the SSV and pump down the compressor.
3. Front seat the DSV valve to isolate the compressor.
4. Disconnect the DUV from the top of compressor and install a 1/2 to 1/4 flared adapter / O-ring (P/N 40-
50076-00sv).
Figure 7.16 Adapter and O-Ring
1/2” 1/4”
O-Ring
5. Using refrigerant (R-134a or R-513A as specified for the unit model number) or Nitrogen, pressurize the line
to 50 psi (3.5 bar) at the adapter connection and close supply at the tank. Pressure should hold as the valve
is normally closed. If pressure drops, check for leaks at the installed fitting (part number 40-50076-00sv);
repair and retest. If pressure increases at the suction service valve and decreases at the pressure supply;
the valve is leaking and should be replaced. If no leak proceed to step 6.
6. Energize the DUV by removing the coil and placing a magnet on the valve stem opening the valve. If the
pressure does not increase at the SSV and decrease at the supply, replace the valve as it did not open.
If a magnet is not available, a jumper procedure can be used as follows:
1. Remove all four controller fuses (F1, F2, F3a, F3b).
2. Remove the KA6 wire from the KA controller connector on the front of the controller.
3. Disconnect the X1 wire from the 24VAC side of the transformer (black wire) and locate it away from the
transformer.
4. Jumper between the black transformer wires to the KA6 wire removed from the connector.
5. Connect power to the unit and turn the circuit breaker on. The DUV coil is now energized.
6. Pressure should drop.
7. Power the circuit breaker off, reconnect wires and reinstall fuses.
8. If the valve opens and closes properly, the failure mode is with the compressor and it should be changed at
the earliest opportunity.
T-362 7–26
7.24 DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE (DUV)
7.24.1 Removing the DUV

1. Pump down the compressor (refer to Section 7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge valves. In the
event the DUV is stuck open and compressor cannot pump down, remove charge.
! CAUTION
3. Loosen the bolt on top of the DUV and remove the coil assembly.
NOTE
There is a small spacer tube between the top of the valve and the 12 VDC coil that needs to be rein-
stalled into the solenoid valve coil. When removing the coil, it may fall out when lifted from the valve
body. Take care that the spacer is not lost; the valve will not function correctly without it.
4. Remove the clamps holding the DUV to the discharge line.
5. Loosen the nuts attaching the DUV to the top of the compressor.
6. Remove the valve. The preferred method of removing the solenoid valve is to cut the connection between
the brazed section and the valve, using a small tube cutter. Remove valve. (See Figure 7.17).
Alternatively, use a wet rag to keep valve cool. Heat outlet connection to valve body and remove valve.
Figure 7.17 View of Digital Unloader Valve (DUV) Assembly
Screen Valve Strainer Tube

O-ring (hidden)
Sleeve
Solenoid Valve Body

Hex Nut, 1/2 OD
7. Examine the compressor and service valves. Ensure that the o-ring is not stuck in the gland of the valve.
8. Discard the o-ring on the o-ring face seal connection.
7.24.2 Installing the DUV

1. Lubricate the gland shoulder area and o-ring with refrigerant oil.
2. Fit the new valve in position and hand-tighten the o-ring nut.
3. Use a wet rag to keep the valve cool while brazing. Braze the DUV to service valve connection.
4. Reinstall and tighten the brackets that secure the valve body to the discharge line.
5. Torque the o-ring face seal connections to 18 to 20 ft-lbs.
6. Install the coil onto the valve body and tighten the attachment bolt.
NOTE
Confirm that the small spacer tube is inserted into the coil prior to attaching it to the valve body. The
valve will not function correctly without it.
7. Leak check and evacuate the low side of unit as applicable. Refer to Section 7.6.1.
8. Open the service valves.
7–27 T-362
7.25 VALVE OVERRIDE CONTROLS
Controller function code Cd41 is a configurable code that allows timed operation of the automatic valves for trou-
bleshooting. Test sequences are provided in Table 7–1. Capacity mode (CAP) allows alignment of the economizer
solenoid valve in the standard and economized operating configurations. DUV Capacity Modulation% Setting
(PCnt) and Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) allows opening of the digital unloader valve and electronic expansion
valve, respectively, to various percentages. If the unit is equipped with an LIV, the Liquid Valve Setting allows the
LIV to be automatically controlled, or manually opened and closed.
The Override Timer (tIM) selection is also provided to enter a time period of up to five minutes, during which the over-
ride(s) are active. If the timer is active, valve override selections will take place immediately. If the timer is not active,
changes will not take place for a few seconds after the timer is started. When the timer times out, the override function
is automatically terminated and the valves return to normal machinery control. To operate the override:
1. Press the CODE SELECT key then press an Arrow key until Cd41 is displayed in the left window. The right
window will display a controller communications code.
2. Press the ENTER key. The left display will show a test name alternating with the test setting or time remaining.
Use an Arrow key to scroll to the desired test. Press the ENTER key, SELCt will appear in the left display.
3. Use an Arrow key to scroll to the desired setting, and then press the ENTER key. Selections available for
each of the tests are provided in Table 7–1.
4. If the timer is not operating, follow the above procedure to display the timer. Use an Arrow key to scroll to the
desired time interval and press ENTER to start the timer.
5. The above described sequence may be repeated during the timer cycle to change to another override.
Table 7–1 Valve Override Control Displays

LEFT DISPLAY CONTROLLER COMMUNICATION SETTING CODES (RIGHT DISPLAY)
CODES (RIGHT DISPLAY)
Cd 41/SELCt tIM 0 00 (0 minutes/0 Seconds)
(Override Timer) In 30 second increments to
5 00 (5 minutes/ 0 seconds)
PCnt AUtO
(% Setting - DUV Capacity Modulation) (Normal Machinery Control)
0
3
6
10
25
50
100
EEV AUtO
(% Setting - Electronic Expansion Valve) (Normal Machinery Control)
CLOSE (Closed)
0
3
6
10
25
50
100
CAP AUtO (Normal Control)
(Capacity Mode)
Std
UnLd
(Economizer = Closed)
ECOn (Economizer = Open)
T-362 7–28
7.26 AUTOTRANSFORMER
If the unit does not start, check the following:
1. Verify the 460 VAC (yellow) power cable is plugged into the receptacle (see Figure 7.18) and locked in place.
2. Verify that circuit breakers CB-1 and CB-2 are in the “ON” position. If the circuit breakers do not hold in,
check voltage supply.
3. Using a voltmeter, and with the primary supply circuit ON, check the primary (input) voltage (460 VAC). Next,
check the secondary (output) voltage (230 VAC). The transformer is defective if output voltage is not available.
Figure 7.18 Autotransformer
Circuit Breaker
(CB-2) 230-Volt 460 VAC Power
Receptacle
Dual Voltage Modular

Autotransformer
7.27 CONTROLLER
7.27.1 Handling Modules
! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from module unless you are grounded to the unit frame with a
static safe wrist strap.
! CAUTION
Unplug all module connectors before performing arc welding on any part of the container.
The guidelines and cautions provided herein should be followed when handling the modules. These precautions
and procedures should be implemented when replacing a module, when doing any arc welding on the unit, or when
service to the refrigeration unit requires handling and removal of a module.
1. Obtain a grounding wrist strap (Carrier Transicold P/N 07-00304-00) and a static dissipation mat (Carrier
Transicold P/N 07-00277-00). The wrist strap, when properly grounded, will dissipate any potential static
buildup on the body. The dissipation mat will provide a static-free work surface on which to place and/or ser-
vice the modules.
2. Disconnect and secure power to the unit.
3. Place strap on wrist and attach the ground end to any exposed unpainted metal area on the refrigeration
unit frame (bolts, screws, etc.).
4. Carefully remove the module. Do not touch any of the electrical connections if possible. Place the module
on the static mat.
NOTE
The strap should be worn during any service work on a module, even when it is placed on the mat.
7–29 T-362
7.27.2 Controller Troubleshooting
A group of test points (TP, see Figure 7.19) are provided on the controller for troubleshooting electrical circuits (see
schematic diagram sections). A description of the test points follows:
NOTE
Use a digital voltmeter to measure AC voltage between TP’s and ground (TP9), except for TP8.
TP 1 - Not used in this application.

TP 2 - Check if the high pressure switch (HPS) is open or closed.
TP 3 - Check if the water pressure switch (WP) contact is open or closed.
TP 4 - Check if the internal protector for the condenser fan motor (IP-CM) is open or closed.
TP 5 - Check if the internal protectors for the evaporator fan motors (IP-EM1 or IP-EM2) are open or closed.
TP 6 (if equipped) - Check if the controller liquid injection valve relay (TQ) is open or closed.
TP 7 - Check if the controller economizer solenoid valve relay (TS) is open or closed.
TP 8 - Not used in this application.
TP 9 - Chassis (unit frame) ground connection.
TP 10 - Check if the heat termination thermostat (HTT) contact is open or closed.
Figure 7.19 Controller Section of the Control Box
Mounting Screw
Controller
Controller Software
Programming Port
Test Points
7.27.3 Controller Programming Procedure
! CAUTION
The unit must be OFF whenever a programming card is inserted or removed from the controller
programming port.
1. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0” to turn the unit Off.
2. Insert software/programming PCMCIA card containing the following (example) files into the programming/
software port. (See Figure 7.19)
menuDDMM.ml3, this file allows the user to select a file/program to upload into the controller.
cfYYMMDD.ml3, multi-configuration file.
3. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “I” to turn the unit On.
T-362 7–30
Programming Procedure for Software Versions 5354 and Greater & With Updated Menu Option
(menu0115.ml)
NOTE
Units must be loaded with software version 5354 or higher. See the label in the control box door for
factory installed software version.
The updated menu option allows the operational software to be loaded, and time and container identification to be set.
7.27.4 Loading Operational Software

1. The display module will display the message “SetUP”.
2. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until the display reads “LOAd 53XX” for Scroll.
3. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
4. The display will alternate between the messages “PrESS EntR” and “rEV XXXX”.
5. Press the ENTER key.
6. The display will show the message “Pro SoFt”. This message will last for up to one minute.
7. The display module will go blank briefly, then read “Pro donE” when the software loading has loaded.
If a problem occurs while loading the software, the display will blink the message “Pro FAIL” or “bad
12V.” Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0” and remove the card.
9. Remove the PCMCIA card from the programming/software port.
10. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “I” to return the unit to normal operation.
11. Turn power on and wait about 15 seconds for the new software to load into the controller memory. The sta-
tus LED will flash quickly and the display will remain blank as the controller loads the new software. When
complete, the controller will reset and power up normally.
12. Wait for the default display: setpoint on the left, and control temperature on the right.
13. Navigate to function code Cd18 and confirm that the software is correct.
14. Turn power off. Operational software is loaded.
7.27.5 Loading Configuration Software

2. Insert software/programming PCMCIA card containing the following (example) files into the programming/
software port. (See Figure 7.19):
menuDDMM.ml3, this file allows the user to select the file/program to upload into the controller.
cfYYMMDD.ml3, multi-configuration file.
3. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “I” to turn the unit On.
4. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until display reads “Set UP”.
6. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until display reads XXXX the message ruN COnFG.
If a defective card is being used the display will blink the message “bAd CArd.” Place the Start-Stop
switch (ST) to “0” and remove the card.
8. The display module will go blank briefly and then display “551 00”, based on the operational software
installed.
9. Press the Up or Down Arrow key to scroll through the list to obtain the proper model dash number.
If a defective card is being used, the display will blink the message “bAd CArd.” Place the Start-Stop
switch (ST) to “0” to turn the unit Off and remove the card.
7–31 T-362
11. When software loading has successfully completed, the display will show the message “EEPrM donE.”
If a problem occurs while loading the software, the display will blink the message “Pro FAIL” or “bad
12V.” Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0” to turn the unit Off and remove the card.
13. Remove the PCMCIA card from the programming/software port.
14. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “I” to return the unit to normal operation.
15. Navigate to function code Cd20 and confirm that the correct model configuration is displayed. The model
displayed should match the unit serial number plate.
7.27.6 Setting the Date and Time

1. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until the display reads “Set TIM”.
3. The first value to be modified is the date in YYYY MM-DD format. The values will be entered from right to
left. Press the Up or Down Arrow key to increase or decrease the values. The ENTER key will enter the
information for the current field and move to the next value; the CODE SELECT key will allow modification
of the previous value.
5. The next value to be modified is the time in HH MM format. The values will be entered from right to left.
Press the Up or Down Arrow key to change the values. The ENTER key will enter the information for the
current field and move to the next value; the CODE SELECT key allows modification of the previous value.
6. Press the ENTER key. The date and time will not be committed until start up procedures are completed on
the next power up.
7.27.7 Setting the Container ID:
NOTE
The characters will be preset to the container ID already on the controller. If none exist, the default will
be AAAA0000000.
1. Press the Up or Down Arrow key until display reads “Set ID”.
3. Values will be entered from right to left. Press the Up or Down Arrow key to increase or decrease the values.
ENTER will enter the information for the current field and move to the next value; CODE SELECT will allow
modification of the previous value.
4. When the last value is entered, press the ENTER key to enter the information to the controller; the CODE
SELECT key will allow modification of the previous value.
7.27.8 Removing and Installing a Controller

a. Removal:
1. Disconnect all front wire harness connectors and move wiring out of the way.
2. The lower controller mounting is slotted. Loosen the top mounting screw (see Figure 7.19) and lift up and out.
3. Disconnect the back connectors and remove the module.
4. When removing the replacement module from its packaging, note how it is packaged. When returning the
old module for service, place it in the packaging in the same manner as the replacement. The packaging
has been designed to protect the module from both physical and electrostatic discharge damage during
storage and transit.
b. Installation:
1. Install the module by reversing the removal steps.
2. Torque values for mounting screws (item 2, see Figure 7.19) are 0.23 mkg (20 inch-pounds). Torque value
for the connectors is 0.12 mkg (10 inch-pounds).
T-362 7–32
7.27.9 Battery Replacement
Standard Battery Location (Standard Cells):
1. Turn unit power Off and disconnect the power supply.
2. Slide the bracket out and remove the old batteries. (See Figure 4.4, Item 8.)
3. Install new batteries and slide the bracket into the control box slot.
! CAUTION
Use care when cutting wire ties to avoid nicking or cutting wires.
Standard Battery Location (Rechargeable Cells):
2. Disconnect the battery wire connector from the control box.
3. Slide out and remove the old battery and bracket. (See Figure 4.4, Item 8.)
4. Slide the new battery pack and bracket into the control box slot.
5. Reconnect the battery wire connector to the control box and replace wire ties that were removed.
Secure Battery Option (Rechargeable Cells Only):
2. Open the control box door and remove both the high voltage shield and clear plastic rain shield (if installed).
3. Disconnect the battery wires from the “KA” plug positions 14, 13, 11.
4. Using Driver Bit, Carrier Transicold part number 07-00418-00, remove the four screws securing the display
module to the control box. Disconnect the ribbon cable and set the display module aside.
NOTE
The battery wires must face toward the right.
5. Remove the old battery from the bracket and clean bracket surface. Remove the protective backing from the
new battery and assemble to the bracket. Secure battery by inserting the wire tie from the back of the
bracket around the battery, and back through the bracket.
6. Reconnect the ribbon cable to display and re-install the display.
7. Route the battery wires from the battery along the display harness and connect the red battery wire and one
end of the red jumper to “KA14,” the other end of the red jumper wire to “KA11,” and the black wire to
“KA13.”
8. Replace wire ties that were removed.
7.28 TEMPERATURE SENSOR SERVICE

Service procedures for the return recorder, return temperature, supply recorder, supply temperature, ambient,
defrost temperature, evaporator temperature, and compressor discharge temperature sensors are provided in this
section.
7.28.1 Sensor Checkout Procedure

This procedure is performed to verify the accuracy of a temperature sensor.
1. Remove the sensor and place in a 0°C (32°F) ice-water bath. The ice-water bath is prepared by filling an
insulated container (of sufficient size to completely immerse bulb) with ice cubes or chipped ice, then filling
voids between ice with water and agitating until mixture reaches 0°C (32°F) measured on a laboratory ther-
mometer.
2. Start the unit and check sensor reading on the control panel. The reading should be 0°C (32°F). If the read-
ing is correct, reinstall sensor; if it is not, continue with the next step.
3. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0” to turn the unit Off. Disconnect the power supply.
7–33 T-362
4. Refer to Section 7.27 to remove the controller to gain access to the sensor plugs.
5. Using the plug connector marked “EC” that is connected to the back of the controller, locate the sensor
wires (RRS, RTS, SRS, STS, AMBS, DTS, or CPDS as required). Follow those wires to the connector and
using the pins of the plug, measure the resistance. Values are provided in Table 7–2 and Table 7–3.
Due to the variations and inaccuracies in ohmmeters, thermometers or other test equipment, a reading
within 2% of the chart value would indicate a good sensor. If a sensor is defective, the resistance read-
ing will usually be much higher or lower than the resistance values given.
Table 7–2 Sensor Resistance - AMBS, DTS, ETS, RRS, RTS, SRS, STS
°C °F OHMS °C °F OHMS
-40 -40 336,500 24.4 76 10,250
-38.9 -38 312,600 25.6 78 9,760
-37.8 -36 290,600 26.7 80 9,299
-36.7 -34 270,300 27.8 82 8,862
-35.6 -32 251,500 28.9 84 8,449
-34.4 -30 234,200 30.0 86 8,057
-33.3 -28 218,200 31.1 88 7,686
-32.2 -26 203,400 32.2 90 7,334
-31.1 -24 189,700 33.3 92 7,000
-30 -22 177,000 34.4 94 6,684
-28.9 -20 165,200 35.6 96 6,384
-27.8 -18 154,300 36.7 98 6,099
-26.7 -16 144,200 37.8 100 5,828
-25.6 -14 134,800 38.9 102 5,571
-24.4 -12 126,100 40.0 104 5,327
-23.3 -10 118,100 41.1 106 5,095
-22.2 -8 110,500 42.2 108 4,874
-21.1 -6 103,600 43.3 110 4,665
-20 -4 97,070 44.4 112 4,465
-18.9 -2 91,030 45.5 114 4,275
-17.8 0 85,400 46.7 116 4,095
-16.7 2 80,160 47.8 118 3,923
-15.6 4 75,270 48.9 120 3,759
-14.4 6 70,720 50.0 122 3,603
-13.3 8 66,460 51.1 124 3,454
-12.2 10 62,500 52.2 126 3,313
-11.1 12 58,790 53.3 128 3,177
-10.0 14 55,330 54.4 130 3,049
-8.9 16 52,090 55.6 132 2,926
-7.8 18 49,060 56.7 134 2,809
-6.7 20 46,230 57.8 136 2,697
-5.6 22 43,580 58.9 138 2,590
-4.4 24 41,100 60.0 140 2,488
T-362 7–34
Table 7–2 Sensor Resistance - AMBS, DTS, ETS, RRS, RTS, SRS, STS (Continued)
-3.3 26 38,780 61.1 142 2,390
-2.2 28 36,600 62.2 144 2,297
-1.1 30 34,560 63.3 146 2,208
0 32 32,650 64.4 148 2,124
1.1 34 30,850 65.6 150 2,042
2.2 36 29,170 68.3 155 1,855
3.3 38 27,590 71.1 160 1,687
4.4 40 26,100 73.9 165 1,537
5.5 42 24,700 76.7 170 1,402
6.6 44 23,390 79.4 175 1,281
7.7 46 22,160 82.2 180 1,171
8.9 48 20,990 85.0 185 1,072
10 50 19,900 87.8 190 983
11.1 52 18,870 90.6 195 902
12.2 54 17,900 93.3 200 829
13.3 56 16,980 96.1 205 762
14.4 58 16,120 98.9 210 702
15.5 60 15,310 101.7 215 647
16.6 62 14,540 104.4 220 598
17.7 64 13,820 107.2 225 553
18.9 66 13,130 110.0 230 511
20.0 68 12,490 112.8 235 473
21.1 70 11,880 115.6 240 438
22.2 72 11,310 118.3 245 406
23.3 74 10,760 121.1 250 378
7–35 T-362
Table 7–3 Sensor Resistance - CPDS
-40 -40 2,889,600 76 168.8 12,306
-38 -36.4 2,532,872 78 172.4 11,524
-36 -32.8 2,225,078 80 176.0 10,793
-34 -29.2 1,957,446 82 179.6 10,122
-32 -25.6 1,724,386 84 183.2 9,494
-30 -22.0 1,522,200 86 186.8 8,918
-28 -18.4 1,345,074 88 190.4 8,376
-26 -14.8 1,190,945 90 194.0 7,869
-24 -11.2 1,056,140 92 197.6 7,404
-22 -7.6 938,045 94 201.2 6,972
-20 -4.0 834,716 96 204.8 6,571
-18 -0.4 743,581 98 208.4 6,197
-16 3.2 663,593 100 212.0 5,848
-14 6.8 593,030 102 215.6 5,529
-12 10.4 530,714 104 219.2 5,233
-10 14.0 475,743 106 222.8 4,953
-8 17.6 426,904 108 226.4 4,692
-6 21.2 383,706 110 230.0 4,446
-4 24.8 345,315 112 233.6 4,204
-2 28.4 311,165 114 237.2 3,977
0 32.0 280,824 116 240.8 3,759
2 35.6 253,682 118 244.4 3,550
4 39.2 229,499 120 248.0 3,354
6 42.8 207,870 122 251.6 3,173
8 46.4 188,494 124 255.2 3,004
10 50.0 171,165 126 258.8 2,850
12 53.6 155,574 128 262.4 2,711
14 57.2 141,590 130 266.0 2,580
16 60.8 129,000 132 269.6 2,454
18 64.4 117,656 134 273.2 2,335
20 68.0 107,439 136 276.8 2,223
22 71.6 98,194 138 280.4 2,119
24 95.2 89,916 140 284.0 2,021
26 78.8 82,310 142 287.6 1,928
28 82.4 75,473 144 291.2 1,839
30 83.0 69,281 146 294.8 1,753
32 89.6 63,648 148 298.4 1,670
34 93.2 58,531 150 302.0 1,591
36 96.8 53,887 152 305.6 1,508
T-362 7–36
Table 7–3 Sensor Resistance - CPDS (Continued)
38 100.4 49,656 154 309.2 1,430
40 104.0 45,812 156 312.8 1,362
42 107.6 42,294 158 316.4 1,302
44 111.2 39,078 160 320.0 1,247
46 114.8 36,145 162 323.6 1,193
48 118.4 33,445 164 327.2 1,142
50 122.0 30,985 166 330.8 1,096
52 125.6 28,724 168 334.4 1,054
54 129.2 26,651 170 338.0 1,014
56 132.8 27,750 172 341.6 975
58 136.4 23,005 174 345.2 938
60 140.0 21,396 176 348.8 902
62 143.6 19,909 178 352.4 867
64 147.2 18,550 180 356.0 834
66 150.8 17,294 182 359.6 798
68 154.4 16,133 184 363.2 764
70 158.0 15,067 186 366.8 733
72 161.6 14,078 188 370.4 706
74 165.2 13,158 190 374.0 697
7.28.2 Sensor Replacement
! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breaker (CB-1) and disconnect main power supply before
removing electrical parts.
1. Place the Start-Stop switch (ST) to “0” to turn the unit Off. Disconnect the power supply.
NOTE
Include white date code label when cutting out and removing defective sensors. The label could be
required for warranty returns.
2. Cut the cable. Slide the cap and grommet off the bulb type sensor and save for reuse. Do not cut the
grommet.
3. Cut one wire of existing cable 40 mm (1-1/2 inches) shorter than the other wire.
4. Cut the replacement sensor wires (opposite colors) back 40 mm (1-1/2 inches). See Figure 7.20.
7–37 T-362
Figure 7.20 Sensor Types
40 mm (1 1/2 in)
Sensor 2 or 3 wires as
required
6.3 mm (1/4 in)
Sensor 40 mm (1 1/2 in)

2 or 3 wires as
required
6.3 mm (1/4 in)
5. Strip back insulation on all wiring 6.3 mm (1/4 inch).

6. Slide a large piece of heat shrink tubing over the cable, and place the two small pieces of heat shrink tubing,
one over each wire, before adding crimp fittings as shown in Figure 7.21.
Figure 7.21 Sensor and Cable Splice
Sensor (typical)
Large Heat Shrink Tubing (1)
Cable Heat Shrink Tubing, 2 or 3 as required
7. If required, slide the cap and grommet assembly onto the replacement sensor.
8. Slip crimp fittings over dressed wires (keeping wire colors together). Make sure wires are pushed into crimp
fittings as far as possible and crimp with crimping tool.
9. Solder spliced wires with a 60% tin and 40% lead Rosincore solder.
10. Slide heat shrink tubing over each splice so that ends of tubing cover both ends of crimp as shown in Figure 7.21.
11. Heat tubing to shrink over splice.Make sure all seams are sealed tightly against the wiring to prevent mois-
ture seepage.
! CAUTION
Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice area as this may affect sensor resistance.
12. Slide large heat shrink tubing over both splices and shrink.
13. Position sensor in unit as shown in Figure 7.21 and re-check sensor resistance:
Figure 7.23 - Return Sensor Positioning
Figure 7.22 - Supply Sensor Positioning
Figure 7.24 - ETS Sensor Positioning
T-362 7–38
14. Reinstall sensor. Refer to:
Section 7.28.3 - For STS and SRS Reinstallation
Section 7.28.4 - For RRS and RTS Reinstallation
Section 7.28.5 - For DTS Reinstallation
Section 7.28.6 - For ETS1 and ETS2 Reinstallation
NOTE
The P5 Pre-Trip test must be run to deactivate probe alarms (refer to Section 5.10).
7.28.3 Sensor STS and SRS Reinstallation

To properly position a unit supply sensor (Supply Temperature Sensor STS or Supply Recorder Sensor SRS), the
sensor must be fully inserted into the probe holder. This positioning will give the sensor the optimum amount of expo-
sure to the supply air stream, and will allow the Controller to operate correctly. Insufficient probe insertion into the
probe holder will result in poor temperature control due to the lack of air flow over the sensor.
It is also necessary to ensure that the probe tip does not contact the back panel. The design minimum clearance of
6 mm (1/4 inch) should be maintained (see Figure 7.22).
Figure 7.22 Supply Sensor Positioning
Sensor Wire
Cap & Grommet Assembly
Evaporator Back
Panel
Probe Holder
Supply Air
Stream
Supply Sensor 6mm (1/4”)
7.28.4 Sensor RRS and RTS Reinstallation

Reinstall the return sensor (Return Temperature Sensor RTS or Return Recorder Sensor RRS), as shown in Fig-
ure 7.23. For proper placement of the return sensor, be sure to position the enlarged positioning section of the sen-
sor against the side of the mounting clamp.
Figure 7.23 Return Sensor Positioning
Mounting Return
Clamp Sensor 1.50 in.
(38.1cm)
[
7–39 T-362
7.28.5 Sensor DTS Reinstallation
The Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) must have insulating material placed completely over the sensor to ensure
the coil metal temperature is sensed.
7.28.6 Sensor ETS1 and ETS2 Reinstallation

The Evaporator Temperature Sensors, ETS1 and ETS2 are located in a tube holder under insulation, as illustrated
in Figure 7.24. When the combo sensor is removed and reinstalled, it must be placed in a tube holder by applying
thermal grease. Insulating material must completely cover the sensor to ensure the correct temperature is sensed.
Figure 7.24 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Positioning
Wire Tie
Insulation
1.0”
ETS Tube Holder 25.4cm
ETS1 and ETS2
7.28.7 Sensor, CPDS Reinstallation

To replace the Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor, see Figure 7.25.
1. Ensure the unit is disconnected from the power source.
2. Verify that the Start-Stop switch (ST) is in the “0” position.
3. Remove the existing sensor.
4. Clean all silicone sealer and dielectric compound from the sensor well. Make sure that the well is clean and
dry. The top of the compressor, where the sensor seals, must also be clean and dry.
Figure 7.25 Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor
Sensor
Silicon Bead
Sensor Well
5. Using the syringe supplied with the replacement sensor, squeeze all of the dielectric compound into the sen-
sor well.
6. Place a bead of the silicone sealer supplied with the replacement sensor around the sensor sealing ring.
Insert sensor into the well with the leads parallel to the suction fitting.
7. Reconnect the sensor (see Figure 7.21) and run pre-trip P5.
T-362 7–40
7.29 VENT POSITION SENSOR (VPS)
The vent position sensor (VPS) determines fresh air vent position in near real-time via function code Cd55.
The fresh air vent position sensor alarm (AL50) will occur if the sensor reading is not stable for four minutes or if the
sensor is outside of its valid range (shorted or open). This can occur if the vent is loose or the panel is defective. To
confirm a defective panel, assure that the wing nut is secure and then power cycle the unit. If the alarm immedi-
ately reappears as active, the panel should be replaced.
The alarm should immediately go inactive. Check the four minute stability requirement. If the alarm reoccurs after
the four minutes and the panel was known to have been stable, then the sensor should be replaced.
Upper VPS:
In order to replace the Upper VPS, the panel must be removed and replaced with another upper fresh air panel
equipped with VPS. Upon installation, a new VPS assembly requires calibration.
1. Rotate the vent to the 0 CMH / CFM position.Cd45 will automatically display.
2. Press and hold the ENTER key for five seconds.
3. After the ENTER key has been pressed the display will read “CAL” (for calibration).
4. Press and hold the ALT MODE key for five seconds.
5. After the calibration has been completed, Cd45 will display 0 CMH / CFM.
7.30 EAUTOFRESH SERVICE

7.31 XTENDFRESH SERVICE

7.32 MAINTENANCE OF PAINTED SURFACES

The refrigeration unit is protected by a special paint system against the corrosive atmosphere in which it normally
operates. However, should the paint system be damaged, the base metal can corrode. In order to protect the refrig-
eration unit from the highly corrosive sea atmosphere, or if the protective paint system is scratched or damaged,
clean the area to bare metal using a wire brush, emery paper or equivalent cleaning method. Immediately following
cleaning, apply paint to the area, and allow to dry. Refer to the Parts List for proper paint selection.
7–41 T-362
7.33 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION
Figure 7.26 Communications Interface Installation
CB1 Communications
Interface Module
Units that have been factory provisioned for installation of a Communication Interface Module (CIM) have the
required wiring installed. If the unit is not factory provisioned, a provision wiring kit (Carrier Transicold part number
76-00685-00) must be installed. Installation instructions are packaged with the kit.
To install the module:
! WARNING
Installation requires wiring to the main unit circuit breaker, CB1. Make sure the power to the
unit is off and power plug disconnected before beginning installation.
1. CB1 is connected to the power system, see wiring schematic. Ensure that the unit power is off AND that the
unit power plug is disconnected.
2. Open control box, (see Figure 7.26) and remove low voltage shield. Open high voltage shield.
3. If using factory provisioned wiring, remove the circuit breaker panel, with circuit breaker, from the control
box. Locate, wires CB21/CIA3, CB22/CIA5 and CB23/CIA7 that have been tied back in the wire harness.
Remove the protective heat shrink from the ends of the wires.
4. Refit the circuit breaker panel.
5. Fit the new CIM into the unit.
6. Attach three wires CB21/CIA3, CB22/CIA5 and CB23/CIA7 to the CIM at connection CIA.
7. Locate connectors CIA and CIB, remove plugs if required, and attach to the module.
8. Replace the low voltage shield.
T-362 7–42
Table 7–4 R-134a Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart
Note: Underline figures are inches of mercury vacuum
°F °C PSIG °C °F BAR
-40 -40.0 14.8 -40 -40.0 -0.49
-38 -38.9 13.9 -39 -38.2 -0.46
-36 -37.8 13.0 -38 -36.4 -0.43
-34 -36.7 12.0 -37 -34.6 -0.40
-32 -35.6 10.9 -36 -32.8 -0.37
-30 -34.4 9.8 -35 -31.0 -0.34
-28 -33.3 8.7 -34 -29.2 -0.30
-26 -32.2 7.5 -33 -27.4 -0.27
-24 -31.1 6.3 -32 -25.6 -0.23
-22 -30.0 5.0 -31 -23.8 -0.20
-20 -28.9 3.7 -30 -22.0 -0.16
-18 -27.8 2.3 -29 -20.2 -0.12
-16 -26.7 0.8 -28 -18.4 -0.07
-14 -25.6 0.3 -27 -16.6 -0.03
-12 -24.4 1.1 -26 -14.8 0.02
-10 -23.3 1.9 -25 -13.0 0.06
-8 -22.2 2.8 -24 -11.2 0.11
-6 -21.1 3.6 -23 -9.4 0.16
-4 -20.0 4.6 -22 -7.6 0.22
-2 -18.9 5.5 -21 -5.8 0.27
0 -17.8 6.5 -20 -4.0 0.33
2 -16.7 7.5 -19 -2.2 0.39
4 -15.6 8.5 -18 -0.4 0.45
6 -14.4 9.6 -17 1.4 0.51
8 -13.3 10.8 -16 3.2 0.57
10 -12.2 11.9 -15 5.0 0.64
12 -11.1 13.1 -14 6.8 0.71
14 -10.0 14.4 -13 8.6 0.78
16 -8.9 15.7 -12 10.4 0.85
18 -7.8 17.0 -11 12.2 0.93
20 -6.7 18.4 -10 14.0 1.01
22 -5.6 19.9 -9 15.8 1.09
24 -4.4 21.3 -8 17.6 1.17
26 -3.3 22.9 -7 19.4 1.25
28 -2.2 24.5 -6 21.2 1.34
30 -1.1 26.1 -5 23.0 1.43
32 0.0 27.8 -4 24.8 1.53
34 1.1 29.5 -3 26.6 1.62
7–43 T-362
36 2.2 31.3 -2 28.4 1.72
38 3.3 33.1 -1 30.2 1.82
40 4.4 35.0 0 32.0 1.93
42 5.6 37.0 1 33.8 2.04
44 6.7 39.0 2 35.6 2.15
46 7.8 41.1 3 37.4 2.26
48 8.9 43.2 4 39.2 2.38
50 10.0 45.4 5 41.0 2.50
52 11.1 47.7 6 42.8 2.62
54 12.2 50.0 7 44.6 2.75
56 13.3 52.4 8 46.4 2.88
58 14.4 54.9 9 48.2 3.01
60 15.6 57.4 10 50.0 3.15
62 16.7 60.0 11 51.8 3.29
64 17.8 62.7 12 53.6 3.43
66 18.9 65.4 13 55.4 3.58
68 20.0 68.2 14 57.2 3.73
70 21.1 71.1 15 59.0 3.88
72 22.2 74.1 16 60.8 4.04
74 23.3 77.1 17 62.6 4.21
76 24.4 80.2 18 64.4 4.37
78 25.6 83.4 19 66.2 4.54
80 26.7 86.7 20 68.0 4.72
82 27.8 90.0 21 69.8 4.90
84 28.9 93.5 22 71.6 5.08
86 30.0 97.0 23 73.4 5.27
88 31.1 100.6 24 75.2 5.46
90 32.2 104.3 25 77.0 5.65
92 33.3 108.1 26 78.8 5.85
94 34.4 112.0 27 80.6 6.06
96 35.6 115.9 28 82.4 6.27
98 36.7 120.0 29 84.2 6.48
100 37.8 124.2 30 86.0 6.70
102 38.9 128.4 31 87.8 6.93
104 40.0 132.7 32 89.6 7.15
106 41.1 137.2 33 91.4 7.39
108 42.2 141.7 34 93.2 7.63
110 43.3 146.4 35 95.0 7.87
112 44.4 151.1 36 96.8 8.12
T-362 7–44
114 45.6 156.0 37 98.6 8.37
116 46.7 160.9 38 100.4 8.63
118 47.8 166.0 39 102.2 8.90
120 48.9 171.2 40 104.0 9.17
122 50.0 176.5 41 105.8 9.44
124 51.1 181.8 42 107.6 9.72
126 52.2 187.4 43 109.4 10.01
128 53.3 193.0 44 111.2 10.30
130 54.4 198.7 45 113.0 10.60
132 55.6 204.6 46 114.8 10.90
134 56.7 210.6 47 116.6 11.21
136 57.8 216.7 48 118.4 11.53
138 58.9 222.9 49 120.2 11.85
140 60.0 229.2 50 122.0 12.18
142 61.1 235.7 51 123.8 12.51
144 62.2 242.3 52 125.6 12.85
146 63.3 249.0 53 127.4 13.20
148 64.4 255.9 54 129.2 13.56
150 65.6 262.9 55 131.0 13.92
56 132.8 14.28
57 134.6 14.66
58 136.4 15.04
59 138.2 15.42
60 140.0 15.82
61 141.8 16.22
62 143.6 16.63
63 145.4 17.04
64 147.2 17.47
65 149.0 17.90
7–45 T-362
Table 7–5 R-513A Refrigerant Pressure Temperature Chart
-40 -40.0 9.8 -40 -40.0 -0.32
-38 -38.9 8.6 -39 -38.2 -0.28
-36 -37.8 7.4 -38 -36.4 -0.25
-34 -36.7 6.2 -37 -34.6 -0.21
-32 -35.6 4.9 -36 -32.8 -0.17
-30 -34.4 3.6 -35 -31.0 -0.13
-28 -33.3 2.2 -34 -29.2 -0.09
-26 -32.2 0.7 -33 -27.4 -0.05
-24 -31.1 0.4 -32 -25.6 0.00
-22 -30.0 1.1 -31 -23.8 0.04
-20 -28.9 1.9 -30 -22.0 0.09
-18 -27.8 2.8 -29 -20.2 0.14
-16 -26.7 3.7 -28 -18.4 0.19
-14 -25.6 4.6 -27 -16.6 0.25
-12 -24.4 5.5 -26 -14.8 0.30
-10 -23.3 6.5 -25 -13.0 0.36
-8 -22.2 7.5 -24 -11.2 0.42
-6 -21.1 8.5 -23 -9.4 0.48
-4 -20.0 9.6 -22 -7.6 0.54
-2 -18.9 10.7 -21 -5.8 0.61
0 -17.8 11.9 -20 -4.0 0.67
2 -16.7 13.1 -19 -2.2 0.74
4 -15.6 14.3 -18 -0.4 0.81
6 -14.4 15.6 -17 1.4 0.89
8 -13.3 16.9 -16 3.2 0.96
10 -12.2 18.3 -15 5.0 1.04
12 -11.1 19.7 -14 6.8 1.12
14 -10.0 21.1 -13 8.6 1.21
16 -8.9 22.6 -12 10.4 1.29
18 -7.8 24.2 -11 12.2 1.38
20 -6.7 25.8 -10 14.0 1.47
22 -5.6 27.5 -9 15.8 1.56
24 -4.4 29.2 -8 17.6 1.66
26 -3.3 30.9 -7 19.4 1.76
28 -2.2 32.7 -6 21.2 1.86
30 -1.1 34.6 -5 23.0 1.97
32 0.0 36.5 -4 24.8 2.07
34 1.1 38.5 -3 26.6 2.18
36 2.2 40.5 -2 28.4 2.30
38 3.3 42.6 -1 30.2 2.41
40 4.4 44.8 0 32.0 2.53
42 5.6 47.0 1 33.8 2.65
44 6.7 49.3 2 35.6 2.78
46 7.8 51.6 3 37.4 2.91
48 8.9 54.0 4 39.2 3.04
50 10.0 56.5 5 41.0 3.18
52 11.1 59.0 6 42.8 3.32
54 12.2 61.6 7 44.6 3.46
56 13.3 64.3 8 46.4 3.60
58 14.4 67.0 9 48.2 3.75
60 15.6 69.8 10 50.0 3.91
62 16.7 72.7 11 51.8 4.06
64 17.8 75.7 12 53.6 4.22
66 18.9 78.7 13 55.4 4.39
68 20.0 81.8 14 57.2 4.56
70 21.1 85.0 15 59.0 4.73
72 22.2 88.2 16 60.8 4.91
74 23.3 91.6 17 62.6 5.09
76 24.4 95.0 18 64.4 5.27
78 25.6 98.5 19 66.2 5.46
80 26.7 102.1 20 68.0 5.65
82 27.8 105.7 21 69.8 5.85
84 28.9 109.5 22 71.6 6.05
86 30.0 113.3 23 73.4 6.26
88 31.1 117.3 24 75.2 6.47
90 32.2 121.3 25 77.0 6.68
92 33.3 125.4 26 78.8 6.90
94 34.4 129.6 27 80.6 7.13
96 35.6 133.9 28 82.4 7.36
98 36.7 138.3 29 84.2 7.59
100 37.8 142.8 30 86.0 7.83
102 38.9 147.4 31 87.8 8.07
104 40.0 152.0 32 89.6 8.32
106 41.1 156.8 33 91.4 8.57
108 42.2 161.7 34 93.2 8.83
110 43.3 166.7 35 95.0 9.10
112 44.4 171.8 36 96.8 9.37
7–47 T-362
114 45.6 177.0 37 98.6 9.64
116 46.7 182.3 38 100.4 9.92
118 47.8 187.7 39 102.2 10.21
120 48.9 193.3 40 104.0 10.50
122 50.0 198.9 41 105.8 10.79
124 51.1 204.7 42 107.6 11.10
126 52.2 210.5 43 109.4 11.40
128 53.3 216.5 44 111.2 11.72
130 54.4 222.7 45 113.0 12.04
132 55.6 228.9 46 114.8 12.36
134 56.7 235.2 47 116.6 12.70
136 57.8 241.7 48 118.4 13.03
138 58.9 248.3 49 120.2 13.38
140 60.0 255.1 50 122.0 13.73
142 61.1 261.9 51 123.8 14.09
144 62.2 268.9 52 125.6 14.45
146 63.3 276.1 53 127.4 14.82
148 64.4 283.3 54 129.2 15.20
150 65.6 290.8 55 131.0 15.58
56 132.8 15.97
57 134.6 16.37
58 136.4 16.77
59 138.2 17.18
60 140.0 17.60
61 141.8 18.03
62 143.6 18.46
63 145.4 18.90
64 147.2 19.35
65 149.0 19.80
T-362 7–48
Table 7–6 Recommended Bolt Torque Values (Dry, Non-Lubricated for 18-8 Stainless Steel)
BOLT DIAMETER THREADS IN-LBS FT-LBS N-m
Free Spinning
#4 40 5.2 0.4 0.6
#6 32 9.6 0.8 1.1
#8 32 20 1.7 2.3
#10 24 23 1.9 2.6
1/4 20 75 6.3 8.5
5/16 18 132 11 14.9
3/8 16 240 20 27.1
7/16 14 372 31 42
1/2 13 516 43 58.3
9/16 12 684 57 77.3
5/8 11 1104 92 124.7
3/4 10 1488 124 168.1
Non Free Spinning (Locknuts etc.)
1/4 20 82.5 6.9 9.3
5/16 18 145.2 12.1 16.4
3/8 16 264 22.0 29.8
7/16 14 409.2 34.1 46.2
1/2 13 567.6 47.3 64.1
9/16 12 752.4 62.7 85
5/8 11 1214.4 101.2 137.2
3/4 10 1636.8 136.4 184.9
7–49 T-362
SECTION 8
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC AND DIAGRAMS
Figure 8.1 LEGEND - Standard Unit Configuration
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

AMBS AMBIENT SENSOR (C- 23) HS HUMIDITY SENSOR (OPTIONAL) (F- 23)
C CONTROLLER (L- 21) HTT HEAT TERMINATION THERMOSTAT (E- 15)
CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER - 460 VOLT (J- 1) ICF INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR FRONT (T- 23)
CB2 OPTIONAL CIRCUIT BREAKER - DVM (OPTION) ICR INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR REAR (T- 24)
(D- 1) TERMINAL BLOCK WHEN CB2 NOT PRESENT
IP INTERNAL PROTECTOR (E- 14, F- 11, G- 14)
CF CONDENSER FAN CONTACTOR (N- 8, L- 11)
IRL IN RANGE LIGHT (OPTION) (K- 15)
CH COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR (L- 10, P- 1)
PA UNIT PHASE CONTACTOR (K- 9, L- 8, N- 1)
CI COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE (OPTION)
(A- 4) PB UNIT PHASE CONTACTOR (K- 8, L- 9, N- 3)
CL COOL LIGHT (OPTION) (L- 12) PR USDA PROBE RECEPTACLE (M- 24, N- 24, P- 24)
CM CONDENSER FAN MOTOR (E- 11, G- 11, R- 9) PTC PTC FOR VENT POSITIONING SENSOR (N- 17)
CP COMPRESSOR MOTOR (T- 4) RM REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE (OPTION)

(K- 7, L- 7, K- 12, L- 12, K- 15, L- 15)
CPDS DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE SENSOR (A- 23)
RRS RETURN RECORDER SENSOR (C- 23)
CS CURRENT SENSOR (M- 2)
RTS RETURN TEMPERATURE SENSOR (B- 23)
DHBL DEFROST HEATER - BOTTOM LEFT (R- 8)
SPT SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (H- 23)
DHBR DEFROST HEATER - BOTTOM RIGHT (T- 7)
SRS SUPPLY RECORDER SENSOR (L- 23)
DHML DEFROST HEATER - MIDDLE LEFT (R- 7)
ST START - STOP SWITCH (K- 5)
DHMR DEFROST HEATER - MIDDLE RIGHT (T- 7)
STS SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SENSOR (A- 23)
DHTL DEFROST HEATER - TOP LEFT (R- 7)
TC CONTROLLER RELAY- COOLING (J- 9)
DHTR DEFROST HEATER - TOP RIGHT (T- 8)
TCC TRANSFRESH COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTOR
DL DEFROST LIGHT (OPTION) (L- 7) (OPTION) (D- 6)
DPT DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (K- 23) TCP CONTROLLER RELAY - PHASE SEQUENCING
DTS DEFROST TEMPERATURE SENSOR (C- 23) (J- 8, J- 9)
DUV DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE (F- 24) TE CONTROLLER RELAY - HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR
DVM DUAL VOLTAGE MODULE (OPTIONAL) (D- 1) FANS (J- 14)
TH CONTROLLER RELAY - HEATING (J- 15)
DVR DUAL VOLTAGE RECEPTACLE (OPTIONAL) (F- 3)
TF CONTROLLER RELAY - DEFROST (E- 7)
EEV ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (R- 16)
TI IN- RANGE RELAY (J- 15)
EF EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR- HIGH SPEED
(N- 11, K- 13) TL CONTROLLER RELAY - COOL LIGHT (J- 12)
EM EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR (T- 11, T- 13, E- 14, F- 14, TN CONTROLLER RELAY - CONDENSER FAN (J- 11)
G- 14)
TP TEST POINT (H- 9, F- 10, H- 11, G- 12, H- 13,
EPT EVAPORATOR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (H- 23) G- 15, L- 17)
ES EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR- LOW SPEED TR TRANSFORMER (M- 3)
(P- 10, L- 13)
TRANS AUTO TRANSFORMER 230/460 (OPTION) (D- 3)
ETS EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (SUCTION)
(D- 23) TRC TRANSFRESH REAR CONNECTOR (OPTION) (E- 7)
ESV ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE (J- 11) TS CONTROLLER RELAY - ECONOMIZER SOLENOID
VALVE (E- 10)
F FUSE (C- 7, D- 7, F- 21, G- 21)
TV CONTROLLER RELAY - LOW SPEED EVAPORATOR
FLA FULL LOAD AMPS FANS (J- 13)
HPS HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (G- 9) VPS VENT POSITION SENSOR (UPPER) (N- 17)
HR HEATER CONTACTOR (N- 7, L- 15) WCR WETTING CURRENT RESISTOR (OPTION) (J- 12)
WP WATER PRESSURE SWITCH (OPTION) (E- 12)
8–1 T-362
Figure 8.2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
Based on Drawing 62- 11737
T-362 8–2
Figure 8.3 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM (Sheet 1 of 2)
8–3 T-362
Figure 8.4 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM (Sheet 2 of 2)
T-362 8–4
Figure 8.5 LEGEND - Unit With Transformer
LEGEND
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

AMBS AMBIENT SENSOR (C- 23) HS HUMIDITY SENSOR (OPTIONAL) (F- 23)
C CONTROLLER (L- 21) HTT HEAT TERMINATION THERMOSTAT (E- 15)
CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER - 460 VOLT (J- 1) ICF INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR FRONT (T- 23)
CB2 OPTIONAL CIRCUIT BREAKER - DVM (OPTION) ICR INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR REAR (T- 24)
(D- 1) TERMINAL BLOCK WHEN CB2 NOT PRESENT
IP INTERNAL PROTECTOR (E- 14, F- 11, G- 14)
CF CONDENSER FAN CONTACTOR (N- 8, L- 11)
IRL IN RANGE LIGHT (OPTION) (K- 15)
CH COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR (L- 10, P- 1)
PA UNIT PHASE CONTACTOR (K- 9, L- 8, N- 1)
CI COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE (OPTION)
(A- 4) PB UNIT PHASE CONTACTOR (K- 8, L- 9, N- 3)
CL COOL LIGHT (OPTION) (L- 12) PR USDA PROBE RECEPTACLE (M- 24, N- 24, P- 24)
CM CONDENSER FAN MOTOR (E- 11, G- 11, R- 9) PTC PTC FOR VENT POSITIONING SENSOR (N- 17)
CP COMPRESSOR MOTOR (T- 4) RM REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE (OPTION)

(K- 7, L- 7, K- 12, L- 12, K- 15, L- 15)
CPDS DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE SENSOR (A- 23)
RRS RETURN RECORDER SENSOR (C- 23)
CS CURRENT SENSOR (M- 2)
RTS RETURN TEMPERATURE SENSOR (B- 23)
DHBL DEFROST HEATER - BOTTOM LEFT (R- 8)
SPT SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (H- 23)
DHBR DEFROST HEATER - BOTTOM RIGHT (T- 7)
SRS SUPPLY RECORDER SENSOR (L- 23)
DHML DEFROST HEATER - MIDDLE LEFT (R- 7)
ST START - STOP SWITCH (K- 5)
DHMR DEFROST HEATER - MIDDLE RIGHT (T- 7)
STS SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SENSOR (A- 23)
DHTL DEFROST HEATER - TOP LEFT (R- 7)
TBU TRANSFORMER BRIDGING UNIT (D- 1, D- 2)
DHTR DEFROST HEATER - TOP RIGHT (T- 8)
TC CONTROLLER RELAY- COOLING (J- 9)
DL DEFROST LIGHT (OPTION) (L- 7)
TCC TRANSFRESH COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTOR
DPT DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (K- 23) (OPTION) (D- 6)
DTS DEFROST TEMPERATURE SENSOR (C- 23) TCP CONTROLLER RELAY - PHASE SEQUENCING
DUV DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE (F- 24) (J- 8, J- 9)
DVM DUAL VOLTAGE MODULE (OPTIONAL) (D- 1) TE CONTROLLER RELAY - HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR
FANS (J- 14)
DVR DUAL VOLTAGE RECEPTACLE (OPTIONAL) (F- 3)
TH CONTROLLER RELAY - HEATING (J- 15)
EEV ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (R- 16)
TF CONTROLLER RELAY - DEFROST (E- 7)
EF EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR- HIGH SPEED
(N- 11, K- 13) TI IN- RANGE RELAY (J- 15)
EM EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR (T- 11, T- 13, E- 14, F- 14, TL CONTROLLER RELAY - COOL LIGHT (J- 12)
G- 14)
TN CONTROLLER RELAY - CONDENSER FAN (J- 11)
EPT EVAPORATOR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (H- 23)
TP TEST POINT (H- 9, F- 10, H- 11, G- 12, H- 13,
ES EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTOR- LOW SPEED G- 15, L- 17)
(P- 10, L- 13)
TR TRANSFORMER (M- 3)
ETS EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (SUCTION)
(D- 23) TRANS AUTO TRANSFORMER 230/460 (OPTION) (D- 3)
ESV ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE (J- 11) TRC TRANSFRESH REAR CONNECTOR (OPTION) (E- 7)
F FUSE (C- 7, D- 7, F- 21, G- 21) TS CONTROLLER RELAY - ECONOMIZER SOLENOID
VALVE (E- 10)
FLA FULL LOAD AMPS
TV CONTROLLER RELAY - LOW SPEED EVAPORATOR
HPS HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (G- 9) FANS (J- 13)
HR HEATER CONTACTOR (N- 7, L- 15) VPS VENT POSITION SENSOR (UPPER) (N- 17)
WCR WETTING CURRENT RESISTOR (OPTION) (J- 12)
WP WATER PRESSURE SWITCH (OPTION) (E- 12)
8–5 T-362
Figure 8.6 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM - Unit With Transformer
T-362 8–6
Figure 8.7 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM, Unit With Autotransformer (Sheet 1 of 2)
8–7 T-362
Figure 8.8 UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM - Unit With Transformer (Sheet 2 of 2)
T-362 8–8
SECTION 9
EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
We, manufacturer: Carrier Transicold Pte Ltd
251 Jalan Ahmad Ibrahim
Singapore 629146
Declare, under our sole responsibility, that the PrimeLINE Container Unit:
Model: 69NT40-561
is in conformity with the provisions of the following European Directives:
• Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC following Annex VIII
• Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2014/30/EU following Annex II
• Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU Annex II (with select options)
The assembly was assessed for applicability under the Pressure Equipment Directive, 2014/68/EU, but determined
to be outside of the scope based on the exclusion indicated in PED Article 1, Paragraph 2.f. The assembly was
determined to be no higher than PED Category I and is covered by the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.
The following Harmonized Standards were applied for this equipment:

Machinery Directive EMC Directive RED Directive
(with select options)
EN ISO 12100:2010 EN 61000-6-4:2007 EN/IEC 60950:2011, EN 62311:2008
EN 60204-1:2006 EN 61000-6-2:2005 EN 300 328 v2.1.1, EN 300 440 v2.1.1
EN 13857:2008 EN 55011:2009 EN 301 511 v12.5.1, EN 301 908-1 v11.1.1
EN 301 489-1 v2.1.1, EN 301 489-3 v2.1.1
EN 301 489-17 v3.1.1, EN 301 489-52 v1.1.0
The following Technical Standards were applied for this equipment:

• ISO 1496-2:2008
Person established in Europe authorized to compile a copy of the Technical File:

Shaun Bretherton
Service Engineering Manager of CTL Rotterdam
Pittsburgstraat 21 3047 BL Rotterdam
Netherlands
9–1 T-362
China RoHS per SJ/T 11364-2014
ӝ૷ѣᴿᇩ⢟䍞Ⲻ੃〦਀੡䠅
ᴿᇩ⢟䍞
䫻 ⊔ 䭿 ‫ޣ‬ԭ䬢 ཐ⓪㚊㤥 ཐ⓪ӂ㤥䟐
䜞Ԭ੃〦 (Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr (VI)) (PBB) (PBDE)
䠇ኔᶵ䜞Ԭ O O O O O O
ງᯏ䜞Ԭ O O O O O O
ⴎ㇗㓺Ԭ X O O O O O
ࣖ✣䜞Ԭ O O O O O O
傢䗴θু㕟ᵰф伄᡽㓺Ԭ O O O O O O
⑟ᓜ᧝࡬ᗤ༺⨼ಞ㌱㔕 X O O O O O
ᯣ䐥ಞф᧛䀜ಞ O O O O O O
਎ুಞ O O O O O O
Ֆ᝕ಞ X O O O O O
䙐䇥㓺Ԭ O O O O O O
䰶㓺Ԭ X O O O O O
⭫㔼㓵/⭫Ⓠ O O O O O O
⭫⊖ O O X O O O
ḽㆴф㔓㕎ᶆᯏ O O O O O O
⧱⪹䜞Ԭ X O O O O O
ᵢ㺞Ṳ‫ ᦤד‬SJ/T 11364 Ⲻ㿺ᇐ㕌࡬Ⱦ
Oφ㺞⽰䈛ᴿᇩ⢟䍞൞䈛䜞Ԭᡶᴿൽ䍞ᶆᯏѣⲺ੡䠅ൽ൞ GB/T 26572 㿺ᇐⲺ䲆䠅㾷≸ԛсȾ
Xφ㺞⽰䈛ᴿᇩ⢟䍞㠩ቇ൞䈛䜞ԬⲺḆжൽ䍞ᶆᯏѣⲺ੡䠅䎻࠰ GB/T 26572 㿺ᇐⲺ䲆䠅㾷≸Ⱦ
62-66122-00, Rev A
INDEX
Numerics Defrost Temperature Sensor 4–11, 4–12
230 Volt Cable 2–3 Defrost Timer 4–13
460 Volt Cable 2–3 Dehumidification 2–2
Description 3–1
A Digital Unloader Valve 7–27
Adding Refrigerant to System 7–7
Adjust Fresh Air Makeup Vent 5–2 E
Air-Cooled Condenser Section 3–5 eAutoFresh 2–4, 7–41
Automatic Cold Treatment (Option) 5–13 eAutoFresh Operation 5–4
Autotransformer 2–3, 7–29 Economized Operation 3–12
Economizer Expansion Valve 7–25
B Economizer Solenoid Valve 7–24
Back Panels 2–3 Electrical Data 3–10
Battery 2–2, 7–33 Electronic Expansion Valve 3–12, 7–21
Emergency Bypass 2–4
C
Cable Restraint 2–3 Emergency Bypass Operation (option) 5–8
CCPC 2–2 ETS1 7–40
Check Controller Function Codes 5–5 ETS2 7–40
Checking the Operation of the Humidity Sensor 7–22 Evacuation and Dehydration 7–4
Checking the Refrigerant Charge 7–6 Evaporator 2–2
Communications Interface Module 2–2, 3–9 Evaporator Coil 7–16
Communications Interface Module Installation 7–42 Evaporator Coil Replacement 7–16
Complete Inspection 5–6 Evaporator Fan 7–19
Compressor 2–2 Evaporator Fan Assembly 7–19
Compressor Section 3–4 Evaporator Fan Operation 2–2, 4–13
Condenser Coil 2–2, 7–10 Evaporator Section 3–2
Condenser Coil Cleaning 7–10 Evaporator Section Cleaning 7–20
Condenser Coil Installation 7–11 F
Condenser Coil Preparation 7–11 Failure Action 4–13
Condenser Coil Removal 7–11 Filter Drier 7–16
Condenser Fan and Fan Motor 7–13 First Aid 1–1
Condenser Fan Motor Remove/Replace 7–13 Fresh Air Make Up 2–3
Condenser Grille 2–4 Fresh Air Makeup Vent 3–2
Configuration Identification 2–1 Front Section 3–1
Configuration Software (CnF Variables) 4–4 Frozen “Heat” Mode 4–10
Connect Power 5–1 Frozen Economy Mode 4–10
Connect Remote Monitoring Receptacle 5–5 Frozen Idle Mode 4–9
Connect Water-Cooled Condenser 5–4 Frozen Mode - Temperature Control 4–9
Connection To 190/230 VAC Power 5–1 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation 4–10
Connection To 380/460 VAC Power 5–1 Frozen Steady State 4–9
Control Box 2–1
Control Box Section 3–8 G
Controller 2–3, 4–3, 7–29 General Description 3–1
Controller Alarm Indications 4–37 Gutters 2–3
Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes 4–51
Controller Software 4–3
H
Handles 2–3
Controller Troubleshooting 7–30
Handling Modules 7–29
CPDS 7–40
High Pressure Switch 7–9
D Humidity Sensor 7–22
DataCORDER 5–6 Humidity Sensor Troubleshooting 7–22
Defrost 4–11
Index–1 T-362
I Return Temperature Sensor 4–12
Inspection 5–1 RRS 7–39
Interrogator 2–2 RTS 7–39
Introduction 2–1, 9–1
S
K Safety and Protective Devices 3–11
Keypad 4–1 Safety Notices 1–1
Safety Summary 1–1
L Sensor 7–37
Labels 2–3 Sensor Checkout 7–33
Lower Air 2–3 Sensor DTS 7–40
Service 7–1
M
Manifold Gauge Set 7–1 Service Connections 7–2
Manual Pump Down 7–4 Specific Hazard Statements 1–1
Megger Testing the Heaters 7–17 SRS 7–39
Microprocessor 4–1 Standard Battery 7–33
Modes of Operation 4–4 Standard Operation 3–12
Motor Assembly 7–19 Start Temperature Recorder 5–6
Start Up - Compressor Bump Start 4–4
O Start Up - Compressor Phase Sequence 4–4
Operating Precautions 1–1 Starting and Stopping Instructions 5–5
Operation 5–1 Starting the Unit 5–5
Operational Software (Cd Function Codes) 4–4 Start-Up Inspection 5–5
Stopping the Unit 5–5
P STS 7–39
Painted Surfaces 7–41
Perishable Dehumidification 4–6 T
Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode 4–6 Temperature Control Microprocessor System 4–1
Perishable Economy 4–7 Temperature Readout 2–1
Perishable Heating 4–5 Temperature Sensor Service 7–33
Perishable Idle, Air Circulation 4–5 Thermometer Port 2–3
Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation 4–7 TripWise (Option) 5–10
Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation 4–8 Troubleshooting 6–1
Perishable Mode Temperature Control 4–4 Troubleshooting P6- 7 (DUV) 7–26
Perishable Pulldown 4–5
Perishable Steady State 4–5 U
Physical Inspection 5–5 Upper Air 2–3
Plate Set 2–2 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent 5–2
Pressure Readout 2–1 USDA 2–2
Pre-Trip Diagnosis 5–6 V
Probe Diagnostics 5–8 Valve Override Controls 7–28
Protection Modes of Operation 4–13 Vent Position Sensor 5–4, 7–41
Pump Down 7–3 VPS 7–41
Q W
Quest - 2–2 Water Cooling 2–3
Water-Cooled Condenser Cleaning 7–13
R
Refrigerant Leak Checking 7–4 Water-Cooled Condenser with Condenser Fan Switch 5–
4
Refrigeration Circuit 3–12
Water-Cooled Condenser with Water Pressure Switch
Refrigeration System Data 3–9
5–4
Refrigeration Unit 3–1
Remote Monitoring 2–2
Replacing High Pressure Switch 7–10
Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly 7–19
T-362 Index–2
Carrier Transicold Division,
Carrier Corporation
A part of UTC Building & Industrial Systems, a business unit of United P.O. Box 4805
Technologies Corporation. Stock symbol UTX. Syracuse, NY 13221 USA
Original Instructions www.carrier.transicold.com

T 362

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

T 362

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

T 362

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Container Refrigeration

OPERATIONS AND SERVICE

© 2018 Carrier Corporation ● Printed in USA November 2018

SAFETY SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section ................................................. 3–1

Table 3–1 Refrigeration System Data ...................................................... 3–9

1.2 FIRST AID

1.3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS

1.4 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

1.5 SPECIFIC HAZARD STATEMENTS

2.3 CONFIGURATION IDENTIFICATION

2.4 FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS

2.4.1 Control Box

2.4.2 Temperature Readout

2.4.3 Pressure Readout

2.4.5 Condenser Coil

2.4.7 Evaporator Fan Operation

2.4.8 Plate Set

2.5 OPTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.5.5 Remote Monitoring

2.5.6 Quest - CCPC

2.5.7 Communications Interface Module

2.5.11 Thermometer Port

2.5.12 Water Cooling

2.5.13 Back Panels

2.5.14 460 Volt Cable

2.5.15 230 Volt Cable

2.5.16 Cable Restraint

2.5.17 Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up)

2.5.18 Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up)

2.5.21 Condenser Grille

2.5.22 Emergency Bypass

3.1.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section

Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section

3.1.3 Evaporator Section

1. Evaporator Fan #1 9. Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT)

1. Evaporator Fan #1 7. Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS)

Figure 3.4 Compressor Section

Figure 3.5 Air-Cooled Condenser Section

1. Grille and Venturi Assembly 9. Filter Drier

Figure 3.6 Tube In Shell Water-Cooled Condenser

1. Water-Cooled Condenser 7. Economizer Expansion Valve

Figure 3.7 Brazed Plate Water-Cooled Condenser

1. Water-Cooled Condenser 3. Self Draining Coupling (Water Out)

Figure 3.8 Control Box Section

1. Compressor Contactor - CH 8. Controller Battery Pack (Standard Location)

3.1.8 Communications Interface Module

Table 3–1 Refrigeration System Data

3.4 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES

Table 3–3 Safety and Protective Devices

3.5.1 Standard Operation

3.5.2 Economized Operation

3.5.3 Electronic Expansion Valve

1. Compressor 13. Economizer TXV Sensing Bulb

1. Compressor 13. Economizer TXV Sensing Bulb

1. Compressor 14. Economizer Solenoid Valve

1. Compressor 15. Economizer Solenoid Valve

Figure 4.1 Temperature Control System

4.1.1 Display Module and Keypad